Toshiba 50Hpx95 Owners Manual

50HPX95 42HPX95-50HPX95_E

50HPX95 to the manual 2a1d31b2-2e38-4635-8128-0992b220b519

2014-12-13

: Toshiba Toshiba-50Hpx95-Owners-Manual-129210 toshiba-50hpx95-owners-manual-129210 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 126 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

42HPX95

50HPX95

Integrated High Definition

Plasma Television

OWNER’S MANUAL

Owner’s Record

The model number and serial number are on the back

of your TV. Record these numbers in the spaces below.

Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate

with your Toshiba dealer about this TV.

Model number:

Serial number:

HIGH-DEFINITION TELEVISION

Compatible with the new Toshiba

Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder!

See pages 26 and 55 for details.

For an overview of steps for setting up

and using your new TV, see page 10.

Note: A high definition tuner and programming are required

to view High Definition TV broadcasts. Please contact your

cable or satellite provider.

YC/M 23566767

#01E_001_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:49 AM1

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Safety Precautions

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE

TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER

SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

WARNING

To prevent injury, this apparatus must be securely attached

to the floor/wall in accordance with the installation

instructions. (See item 19 on page 3.)

Child Safety

It Makes A Difference

Where Your TV Stands

Congratulations on your purchase! As you enjoy

your new TV, keep these safety tips in mind:

The Issue

If you are like most consumers, you have a TV in your home.

Many homes, in fact, have more than one TV.

The home theater entertainment experience is a growing

trend, and larger TVs are popular purchases; however, they

are not always supported on the proper TV stands.

Sometimes TVs are improperly secured or inappropriately

situated on dressers, bookcases, shelves, desks, audio

speakers, chests, or carts. As a result, TVs may fall over, causing

unnecessary injury.

Toshiba Cares!

 The consumer electronics industry is committed

to making home entertainment enjoyable and safe.

 The Consumer Electronics Association formed

the Home Entertainment Support Safety

Committee, comprised of TV and consumer

electronics furniture manufacturers, to advocate

children’s safety and educate consumers and their

families about television safety.

Tune Into Safety

 One size does NOT fit all! Use appropriate furniture large enough to

support the weight of your TV (and other electronic components).

Use appropriate angle braces, straps, and anchors to secure your

furniture to the wall (but never screw anything directly into the TV).

Carefully read and understand the other enclosed instructions for

proper use of this product.

Do not allow children to climb on or play with furniture and TVs.

Avoid placing any item on top of your TV (such as a VCR, remote

control, or toy) that a curious child may reach for.

Remember that children can become excited while watching

aprogram and can potentially push or pull a TV over.

Share our safety message about this hidden hazard of

the home

with your family and friends. Thank you!

NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS

This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the U.S. NEC, which provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies

that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding

system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry

as practical. For additional antenna grounding information,

see items 25 and 26 on page 4.

Dear Customer,

Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba Plasma television. This

manual will help you use the many exciting features of your

new Plasma television.

Before operating your Plasma television, please read this

manual completely and keep it nearby for future reference.

WARNING:

Always use the Toshiba wall bracket

specified below or another wall bracket approved by

Toshiba for wall mounting this television. The use of any

wall bracket other than the Toshiba wall bracket

specified below or another wall bracket approved by

Toshiba for wall mounting this television could result in

serious bodily injury and/or property damage.

In the U.S.:

Use Toshiba wall bracket model number FWB3250. For

more information, call TACP’s Consumer Solutions

Center at 1-800-631-3811 or visit TACP’s website at

www.tacp.toshiba.com.

In Canada:

Call TCL’s Customer Service Department at 1-800-268-

3404.

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON

PLASMA DISPLAY

If a fixed (non-moving) pattern or image remains on the

Plasma display for extended periods of time, the image

can become permanently ingrained in the plasma TV

panel and cause subtle but permanent ghost images.

This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR

WARRANTY. See pages 4 and 5 for details.

2500 Wilson Blvd.

Arlington, VA 22201 U.S.A.

Tel. 703-907-7600 Fax 703-907-7690

www.CE.org

CEA is the Sponsor, Producer and

Manager of the International CES

#01E_002-004_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:49 AM2

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Important Safety Instructions

1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

amplifiers) that produce heat.

9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has

two blades and a third grounding prong.

The wide blade or the third prong are

provided for your safety. If the provided

plug does not fit into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being

walked on or pinched, particularly at

plugs, convenience receptacles, and

the point where they exit from the

apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table specified by the

manufacturer, or sold with the

apparatus. When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13) Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when

unused for long periods of

time.

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged

in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the

apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain

or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

14a) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or

enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does not

operate normally, take the following precautions:

•

ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power cord to avoid

possible electric shock or fire.

•

To prevent personal injury, never handle the damaged television.

•

ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect the TV any time

it has been damaged or dropped.

15) The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or

splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as

vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

Installation, Care, and Service

Installation

Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all

warnings when installing your TV:

16) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications

may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user’s authority to

operate this equipment under the rules of the Federal

Communications Commission.

17) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL

INJURY, DEATH, OR EQUIPMENT

DAMAGE! Never place the TV on

an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV

may fall, causing serious personal injury,

death, or serious damage to the TV.

18) Never place items such as vases, aquariums, or candles

on top of the TV.

19) Always place the

TV on the floor or

a sturdy, level,

stable surface that

can support the

weight of the unit.

Use a sturdy tie

between the TV’s

rear hook and the

rear wall, pillar, etc., to secure the TV. If you use a TV

stand, fix the TV by using the attached band.

20) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing liquid

or place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item

filled with liquid, or candles on top of the TV.

21) Never block or cover the slots

or openings in the TV cabinet

back, bottom, and sides.

Never place the TV:

•on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar

surface;

•too close to drapes, curtains,

or walls; or

•in a confined space such as a bookcase, built-in cabinet,

or any other place with poor ventilation.

The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from

overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the

TV. Leave a space of at least 4 inches around the TV.

22) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power

cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is

subject to wear or abuse.

23) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.

24) Always operate the TV with

a 120V AC, 60Hz power source

only.

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not

use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or

other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely

with three-wire grounding type to prevent blade exposure.

120V AC

TV side TV top

Clip

Band

Sturdy tie

(as short as possible)

Screw

Hooks

#01E_002-004_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:49 AM3

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Care

(cont. from previous column)

30)While it is thundering, do not touch the connecting cables

or apparatus.

31)For added protection of your TV from lightning and power

surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the

antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or

unused for long periods of time.

32) During normal use, the TV may make occasional snapping

or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the

unit is being turned on or off. If these sounds become

frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord and

contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.

33) Possible Adverse Effects on Plasma Display

If a fixed (non-moving) pattern or image remains on the

Plasma display for extended periods of time, the image

can become permanently ingrained in the plasma panel of

the TV and cause subtle but permanent ghost images.

This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR

WARRANTY.

Never leave the Plasma TV on for extended periods of time

while it is displaying the following images or formats:

•Fixed (non-moving) images, including but not limited

to PIP/POP windows, closed captions, video game

patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and websites.

•Special formats that do not use

the entire screen, including but not

limited to widescreen or letterbox

format media viewed on a 4:3

aspect ratio display (with gray or

black bars at the top and bottom of the screen) and 4:3

aspect ratio format media viewed on a widescreen/16:9

aspect ratio display (with gray or black bars on the left

and right sides of the screen).

Service

34) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Never attempt to service the TV yourself. Opening

and removing the covers (except as specified

herein) may expose you to dangerous voltage or other

hazards. Refer all servicing to a Toshiba Authorized Service

Center.

35) If you have the TV serviced:

•Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer.

•Upon completion of service, ask the service technician to

perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is

in safe operating condition.

36)When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a

qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV.

Installation

(cont. from previous page)

25) Always make sure the antenna system is properly

grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage

surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the

National Electric Code).

26) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL

INJURY OR DEATH!

•Use extreme care to make sure you are never in

a position where your body (or any item you are in contact

with, such as a ladder or screwdriver) can accidentally

touch overhead power lines. Never

locate the antenna near overhead

power lines or other electrical

circuits.

•Never attempt to install any of the

following during lightning activity:

a) an antenna system; or b) cables, wires, or any home

theater component connected to an antenna or phone

system.

Care

For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA

TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:

27)

If you use the TV in the room of 0°C or less, the picture

brightness may vary until the plasma monitor warms up. This

is not a sign of a malfunction.

28) Always unplug the TV before

cleaning.

Wipe the display panel surface

gently using only the supplied

wiping cloth or a soft cloth

(cotton, flannel, etc.). A hard

cloth may damage the surface

of the panel. Avoid contact with alcohol, thinner, benzene,

acidic or and alkaline solvent cleaners, abrasive cleaners,

or chemical cloths, as the surface may be impaired.

29) WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Never spill liquids or push objects of any kind

into the TV cabinet slots.

Ground clamp

Antenna discharge unit

(NEC Section 810-20)

Grounding conductors

(NEC Section 810-21)

Power service grounding

electrode system (NEC Art 250 Part H)

Ground clamps

Antenna lead-in wire

Electric service equipment

#01E_002-004_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:50 AM4

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Important notes about your Plasma TV

The following symptoms are not signs of malfunction,

but rather technical limitations of plasma TV

technology.

1) The display of this Plasma TV radiates infrared rays. It may

affect other infrared communication equipment under

certain operating conditions.

2) Under certain conditions, the display of this Plasma TV

may cause interference with the audio and/or video of

certain types of electronic equipment that easily receive

electromagnetic waves (e.g., AM radios and video

equipment). In particular, the display of this Plasma TV

may affect certain types of electronic equipment that are

located beyond the area where the Plasma TV is being

used.

3) The display panel of this Plasma TV is manufactured using

an extremely high level of precision technology. However,

occasionally some parts of the screen may be missing

picture elements and/or have luminous spots.

4) You can enjoy playing video games on this Plasma TV.

However, certain video games that utilize so-called “light

gun” joysticks for shooting at on-screen targets may not

work with this Plasma TV.

5) Possible Adverse Effects on Plasma Display

Like all phosphor-based display devices and all gas-based

plasma displays, the display of this Plasma TV may be

susceptible to permanent ghost images (also known as

phosphor burn-in) under certain circumstances. Certain

operating conditions may accelerate the potential for

phosphor burn-in, including but not limited to the

following:

•Displaying fixed (non-moving) images, including but

not limited to PIP/POP windows, closed captions, video

game patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and

websites.

FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement (Part 15):

•Displaying special formats that do not use the entire

screen, including but not limited to widescreen or

letterbox format media viewed on a 4:3 aspect ratio

display (with gray or black bars at the top and bottom of

the screen) and 4:3 aspect ratio format media viewed on

a widescreen/16:9 aspect ratio display (with gray or

black bars on the left and right sides of the screen).

To minimize the potential for the occurrence of phosphor

burn-in, Toshiba recommends the following:

•Display a moving image on the display of your Plasma

TV whenever possible.

•Always turn off the power of your Plasma TV when you

are finished using it.

•Reduce the Brightness and Contrast levels as much as

possible without impairing image quality.

•Enable the Long Life settings (see page 95).

•Try to display images that have many colors and color

gradations (i.e., photographic or photo-realistic images).

•Try to display images that have minimal contrast

between light and dark areas (e.g., avoid white

characters on black backgrounds).

•Try to avoid displaying images that have few colors and/

or that have distinct, sharply defined borders between

colors.

About the ISM function

This TV contains an “image sticking minimization” (ISM)

feature that automatically starts to decrease the picture

brightness in small increments when a fixed (non-moving)

image is displayed on-screen for an extended period of time.

This feature helps to reduce and delay the potential for

phosphor burn-in. The time delay and rate of decreasing

picture brightness depend on the brightness of the displayed

image.

The Toshiba 42HPX95/50HPX95 Plasma Color

Televisions comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference that may cause

undesired operation.

The party responsible for compliance to these rules is:

Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

82 Totowa Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470.

Ph: (973) 628-8000

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with

the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC

rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection

against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,

there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to

radio or television reception, which can be determined by removing

and applying power to the equipment, the user is encouraged to try

to correct the interference by one or more of the following

measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

-Increase the separation between the equipment and the

receiver.

-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different

from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician

for help.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this equipment not

expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user’s authority to

operate this equipment.

#01E_005-007_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:50 AM5

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Contents

Important Safety Information ............................................. 2-4

FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement

(Part 15): ................................................................................ 5

Important notes about your Plasma TV ............................... 5

Chapter 1: Introduction .......................................................... 8

Welcome to Toshiba ........................................................... 8

Features of your new TV .................................................... 8

Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and

using your new TV .................................................... 10

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV ......................................... 11

TV front and side panel controls and connections ............ 11

TV back panel connections ................................................ 12

Overview of cable types ...................................................... 14

About the connection illustrations ...................................... 15

Connecting a digital CableCARD

™

.................................... 15

Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV

(no Cable box) ............................................................... 16

Connecting a camcorder ..................................................... 16

Connecting a VCR and Cable box ..................................... 17

Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver ............................. 18

Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR,

and a Cable box .............................................................. 19

Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream

(component video) and a VCR ....................................... 20

Connecting two VCRs ....................................................... 21

Connecting an HDMI

™

or a DVI device to the

HDMI input .................................................................. 22

Connecting a digital audio system ...................................... 23

Connecting an analog audio system .................................... 23

Controlling infrared remote-controlled devices

through the TV (IR pass-through) .................................. 24

Connecting IEEE1394 video devices .................................. 25

Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices ............... 25

Supported signals ........................................................ 25

Using TheaterNet

™

on-screen device control .............. 25

Connecting an AVHD (external hard drive) or D-VHS

digital recorder ........................................................ 26

IEEE1394 device initialization .................................... 26

IEEE1394 device management ................................... 27

G-LINK

™

connection ........................................................ 28

Connecting a personal computer (PC) ............................... 29

Connecting to a home network .......................................... 30

Chapter 3: Using the remote control ................................. 31

Learning about the remote control ..................................... 31

Remote control effective range ........................................... 32

Installing the remote control batteries................................. 33

Using the remote control MODE button to control

your other devices........................................................... 33

Remote Control functional key chart ................................. 34

Programming the remote control to operate

your other devices........................................................... 36

Device code setup ....................................................... 36

Searching and sampling the code of a device (8500).... 36

Using the volume lock feature (8000) ......................... 37

Operational feature reset (8900).................................. 37

Multi-brand remote control device codes ............................ 38

Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation ........................... 40

Main menu layout .............................................................. 40

Setup/Installation menu layout........................................... 41

Navigating the menu system............................................... 41

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen

™

setup ............................. 42

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen

™

system ..................... 42

TV Guide On Screen

™

Reminder ............................... 45

Turning off the TV Guide On Screen

™

automatic

display feature ......................................................... 45

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV ............................................. 46

Selecting the menu language............................................... 46

Configuring the antenna input sources ............................... 46

Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory ....... 47

Programming channels automatically .......................... 47

Manually adding and deleting channels in the

channel memory ..................................................... 48

Programming your favorite channels .................................. 49

Setting up and using TheaterNet

™

on-screen

device control ................................................................. 50

Setting up TheaterNet ................................................. 50

Using the TheaterNet control icons............................. 51

TheaterNet IR device codes .................................. 52–54

Setting the AVHD device skip time .................................... 55

Setting the HDMI

™

audio mode ........................................ 55

Setting the time and date .................................................... 55

Viewing the CableCARD

™

menu ...................................... 56

Viewing the digital signal meter ......................................... 56

Viewing the system status ................................................... 57

Restore Factory Defaults ............................................. 57

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™

interactive program guide ............................................... 58

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen

™

system ..................... 58

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen

™

system .................... 59

TV Guide On Screen

™

remote control functions ........ 59

Video Window ........................................................... 60

Panel Menus ............................................................... 60

Info Box ...................................................................... 61

TV Guide On Screen

™

Icons ...................................... 61

TV Guide On Screen

™

Services .......................................... 62

LISTINGS screen ....................................................... 62

SEARCH screen.......................................................... 63

RECORDINGS screen ............................................... 65

SCHEDULE screen .................................................... 66

Record features ........................................................... 66

Remind features .......................................................... 68

SETUP screen ............................................................. 70

Change system settings .......................................... 70

Change channel display ......................................... 70

Change default options .......................................... 71

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features .....................................72

Selecting the video input source to view ............................. 72

Labeling the video input sources ......................................... 73

Tuning channels ................................................................. 74

Using the ChannelBrowser

™

....................................... 74

Tu ning your favorite channels ..................................... 76

Tu ning to the next programmed channel .................... 76

Tu ning to a specific channel (programmed or

unprogrammed) ...................................................... 76

Switching between two channels using

Channel Return ...................................................... 76

Switching between two channels using

SurfLock

™

............................................................... 76

(Continued on next page)

#01E_005-007_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:50 AM6

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Contents

(Continued from previous page)

Selecting the picture size ..................................................... 77

Scrolling the TheaterWide

picture .................................... 79

Using the auto aspect ratio feature ...................................... 79

Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only) .................... 80

Using the POP features ...................................................... 81

Using the POP double-window feature ....................... 81

Switching the speaker audio (main or POP) ................ 82

POP double-window aspect ratio ................................ 82

Using the FREEZE feature ................................................. 83

Using the favorite channel scan feature ............................... 83

Adjusting the picture .......................................................... 84

Selecting the picture mode .......................................... 84

Adjusting the picture quality ....................................... 84

Using the color management feature ........................... 85

Using CableClear

DNR (digital noise reduction) ...... 86

Selecting the color temperature ................................... 86

Using MPEG noise reduction ..................................... 87

Using dynamic contrast............................................... 87

Using the closed caption mode ........................................... 87

Advanced closed captions ............................................ 88

Digital closed captions ................................................ 89

Adjusting the audio ............................................................ 90

Muting the sound ....................................................... 90

Using the digital audio selector ................................... 90

Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts ................................... 90

Adjusting the audio quality ......................................... 91

Using the StableSound

feature ................................... 91

Using the SRS WOW

™

surround sound feature.......... 92

Using the Dolby Virtual with SRS TruSurround sound

feature ......................................................................... 92

Turning off the built-in speakers ................................. 93

Selecting the optical audio output format ................... 93

Setting the On/Off Timer .................................................. 94

Setting the sleep timer ........................................................ 94

Using the PC setting feature ............................................... 95

Using the Long Life feature ................................................ 95

Picture Shift ................................................................ 95

Gray Level ................................................................... 96

Reverse ........................................................................ 96

White ......................................................................... 96

Displaying the Channel Banner.......................................... 97

Understanding the auto power off feature........................... 97

Understanding the last mode memory feature .................... 97

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu ...................................... 98

Entering the PIN code ....................................................... 98

If you cannot remember your PIN code ............................. 98

Changing your PIN code ................................................... 98

Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip) ......... 99

Blocking channels............................................................. 100

Unlocking programs temporarily ...................................... 100

Locking video inputs ........................................................ 100

Using the GameTimer

™

................................................... 101

Using the panel lock feature ............................................. 101

Chapter 10: Using the memory card JPEG picture

viewer/MP3 audio player .............................................. 102

Memory card specifications .............................................. 102

Using the JPEG picture viewer ......................................... 103

Using the MP3 audio player ............................................. 104

Memory card care and handling ....................................... 105

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network .......... 106

Setting up the Network connection .................................. 106

Setting up the Network address................................. 106

Set up the Email acount ................................................... 107

Timer recording via Email ................................................ 108

Using the audio player/picture viewer via network............ 109

Procedure for setting up mp3 shares on Windows XP

machine running service pack 2 ............................ 109

Procedure for Windows XP with service pack 1 ........ 110

How do I check if my machine is running service

pack 1 or 2?........................................................... 110

Set up the Home File server ...................................... 108

To start the Picture viewer/Audio player.................... 111

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting ............................................. 112

General troubleshooting ................................................... 112

TV Guide On Screen

™

FAQs ................................... 115–117

Chapter 13: Appendix ......................................................... 118

Specifications ................................................................... 119

Limited United States Warranty ....................................... 119

Limited Canada Warranty ................................................ 120

Index .............................................................................. 124, 125

#01E_005-007_4250HPX95 05.7.12, 11:117

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV, one of the innovative Plasma TVs on the

market. The goal of this manual is to guide you through setting up and operating your TV

as quickly as possible.

•This manual applies to models 42HPX95, and 50HPX95. Before you start reading, check the model number on the back of your TV.

•Instructions in this manual are based on using the remote control. You also can use the controls on the TV side panel if they have

the same name as those referred to on the remote control. (MENU on the side panel functions as ENTER when a menu is on-

screen or when the TV Guide On Screen

™

system is open.)

•The side panel and back panel provide terminals for connecting other equipment to your TV. See page 11 for side panel details.

See page 12 for back panel details. See pages 15–30 for instructions on connecting other devices to your TV.

•Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefully, and keep this manual for future reference.

Introduction

Welcome to Toshiba

Features of your new TV

The following are just a few of the many exciting features of your new Toshiba widescreen, integrated HD, Plasma TV:

•

Integrated digital tuning (8VSB ATSC and QAM)

eliminates the need for a separate digital converter set-top box (in most cases).

•

TV Guide On Screen™

no-fee interactive program guide (Chapters 5 and 7).

•

Digital CableCARD™ slot

for viewing encrypted digital Cable TV programs (page 15).

•

Digital recording

by connecting a D-VHS digital recording device or a Toshiba Symbio™ Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder to

one of the IEEE1394 jacks. You can record high definition and standard definition material from either tuner (page 26).

•

Memory card slots

[SD Memory Card, MultiMediaCard, Memory Stick, CompactFlash, xD-PictureCard

™

] for viewing JPEG

files as a “slide show” (page 102) and for playing MP3 files (page 104).

•

TheaterNet™

icons for on-screen control of external

and

IEEE1394

devices (page 51).

•

Two IEEE1394 ports

for multi-device connection and control (page 25).

•

Two HDMI (DVI)

digital, high-definition multimedia interfaces (page 22).

•

Two sets of ColorStream

high-resolution component video inputs (pages 18 and 20).

•

Dolby Digital*

(page 23) and

SRS WOW™

(page 92) audio technologies.

•

Digital Audio Out

optical audio connection (page 23).

•

CableClear

DNR

digital picture noise reduction (page 86).

•Double-window

POP

(page 81) and multi-window

Favorites

(page 83) features.

•PC IN (Analog RGB) computer terminal (page 29).

•RJ-45 (THINC™) port (page 30).

______________

In the United States, TV Guide and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV Guide is a registered mark of

Transcontinental Inc., and is used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. The TV Guide On Screen™ system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide

International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. The TV Guide On Screen™ system is protected by one or more of the following issued United States patents 6,498,895, 6,418,556, 6,331,877;

6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; 4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121.

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OR

AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN™ SYSTEM AND CANNOT GUARANTEE

SERVICE AVAILABILITY IN YOUR AREA. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE ACCURACY OR AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER

DATA IN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN™ SYSTEM.

See “Important notes about your

Plasma TV” on page 5.

Note: After you set up the TV Guide

On Screen™ system (Chapter 5),

the program guide opens

automatically by default when

you turn on the TV. You can turn off

the automatic program guide (page

45) and instead press the TV GUIDE

button on the remote control to

manually open the program guide.

#01E_008-010_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:50 AM8

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

•This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S.

patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology

must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited pay-per-

view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or

disassembly is prohibited.

•WOW, TruSurround, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.

•WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

•

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the

double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

•CableCARD™ is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.

• is a trademark.

•MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG and licensed to

MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association).

•Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

•xD-Picture Card is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

•Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash

and CF logo

registered

trademarks.

Features of your new TV (continued)

Chapter 1: Introduction

#01E_008-010_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:51 AM9

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

1. Carefully read the important safety, installation, care,

and service information on pages 2–5. Keep this

manual for future reference.

2. Observe the following when choosing a location for

the TV:

•

Place the TV on the floor or a sturdy, level, stable surface that can

support the weight of the unit. Secure the TV to a wall, pillar, or

other immovable structure as described on page 3, item 19.

• Place the TV in a location where light does not reflect on the

screen.

•Place the TV far enough from walls and other objects to allow

proper ventilation. Inadequate ventilation may cause

overheating, which will damage the TV. THIS TYPE OF

DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA

WARRANTY.

•Read “Installation” on pages 3–4.

•Read “Important notes about your Plasma TV” on page 5.

3. Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you have

connected all cables and devices to your TV.

4. BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV, learn

the functions of the TV’s connections and controls (pages 11

and 13).

5. Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV

(pages 15–30).

6. Connect the G-LINK™ cable (either one of the enclosed IR

blaster cables) from your VCR and/or Cable box (if applicable)

to the G-LINK™ terminal so you can use the TV Guide

On Screen™ features (applies to VCRs and cable boxes only).

See page 28.

7. Install the batteries in the remote control (page 33).

8. See “Learning about the remote control” (pages 31-33)

for an overview of the buttons on the remote control.

9. Program the remote control to operate your other

device(s) (pages 36–39).

Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and using your new TV

Follow these steps to set up your TV and begin using its many exciting features.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Note:

If you sell or transfer this television to a third party, be sure

to reset the PIN code as described on page 98 under the heading,

“If you cannot remember your PIN code.”

10. AFTER connecting all cables and devices, plug in the

power cords for your TV and other devices.

“Now Booting...” will be displayed on the screen until the picture

appears or the green LED will blink until the TV goes into

standby mode.

When the TV is in standby mode, press POWER on the TV side

panel or remote control to turn on the TV.

11. See “Menu layout and navigation” for a quick overview

of navigating the TV’s menu system (pages 40–41).

12. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen™ system (if available in your area).

13. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen™ program guide (if available in your area).

14. Program channels into the TV’s channel memory

(page 47).

15. Set up the TheaterNet™ on-screen device control

feature (if applicable to your particular home theater system

components) (page 50).

16. For details on using the memory card JPEG picture

viewer and MP3 audio player, see page 102.

17. For details on using the TV’s features, see Chapter 8.

18. For help, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide (Chapter

12).

19. For technical specifications and warranty information,

see Chapter 13.

20. Enjoy your new TV!

If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control

or TV side panel and you cannot turn the TV off or on, press

and hold the POWER button for 5 or more seconds to reset the

TV.

#01E_008-010_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:51 AM10

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV front and side panel controls and connections

Connecting your TV

GUIDE

!º

yz • x 7

CHANNEL

yz 8

VOLUME

• x 9

Green and

Red LEDs

Remote sensor

(behind the screen) — Point the remote

control toward this remote sensor. See “Remote control

effective range” on page 32.

Green and Red LEDs

When the green LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates

that recording is in progress.

When the red LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates

that the TV power cord is plugged in.

POWER

— Press to turn the TV on and off.

TV/VIDEO

— Repeatedly press to change the source you are

viewing (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,

HDMI 1, HDMI 2, ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2,

PC).

EXIT

— Press to close an on-screen menu instantly.

MENU (ENTER)

— Press to access the menu system (see

page 42). When a menu is on-screen or the TV Guide

On Screen

™

program guide is open, the MENU button on

the side panel functions as the ENTER button.

ARROWS

yzx • — When a menu is on-screen, these

buttons function as up/down/left/right menu navigation

buttons.

CHANNEL

yz — When no menu is on-screen, these

buttons change the channel (programmed channels only; see

page 47). When a menu is on-screen, these buttons function

as up/down menu navigation buttons.

VOLUME

x • — When no menu is on-screen, these

buttons adjust the volume level. When a menu is on-screen,

these buttons function as left/right menu navigation

buttons.

GUIDE

— Press to access the TV Guide On Screen

™

program guide. (See page 58 for details on using the

program guide.)

!¡

VIDEO-3

— The side panel A/V connections are referred to

as “VIDEO 3” and include standard A/V connections plus

optional S-video. (The VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2 A/V

connections are on the TV’s back panel; see page 12.)

!™

Memory card slots

— Insert a memory card into one of

the memory card slots to view JPEG files (such as photos) as

a “slide show” on your TV or listen to MP3 audio files (see

page 102).

!£

Headphone jack

—

For use with headphones.

Note: When the Headphone jack is being used, the sound from all

speakers will be muted, and normal sound will be output to the

headphones only.

Remote

sensor

POWER

TV Front

{

Memory card slots

!™

**The MENU button on the TV side panel functions as the ENTER

button in the TV Guide On Screen

™

system or when a menu is

on-screen.

VIDEO-3 IN

!¡

TV/VIDEO

(ENTER)**

EXIT

Left side panel

Headphone jack

!£

Right side panel

#01E_011-014_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:52 AM11

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

___________

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or

registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

TV back panel connections

For an explanation of cable types, see page 14.

VIDEO 1 IN

and

VIDEO 2 IN

— Two sets of standard

(composite) video and standard audio inputs plus optional

S-video inputs for connecting devices with composite video

or S-video output.

Note: Standard (composite) video and S-video cables carry

only video information; separate audio cables are required for a

complete connection.

ColorStream

HD-1

and

ColorStream

HD-2

— Two sets

of ColorStream

high-definition component video and

standard stereo audio inputs for connecting devices with

component video output, such as a Toshiba DVD player

with ColorStream

. See pages 18 and 20.

Note: Component video cables carry only video information;

separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.

A/V OUT

— Standard composite video and analog audio

outputs for connecting a VCR for editing and dubbing. See

page 21 for details.

VARIABLE AUDIO OUT

— Standard analog audio outputs

for connecting an analog amplifier with external speakers.

See page 23.

TheaterNet

™

(IR) OUT

— For controlling infrared remote-

controlled devices through the TV. You can connect up to

two devices with either one of the enclosed IR blaster cables,

and then control the devices using the TV’s IR pass-through

or TheaterNet

™

(on-screen device control) features. See

pages 24 and 51.

TheaterNet™ (IR) IN

— For connecting to IR OUT on

other devices. See page 26.

HDMI AUDIO IN

— For use when connecting a DVI device

with analog audio output to the HDMI input. See page 22.

Also see item 8 on the next page.

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

12 4

9!¡

!™

!£

Power cord*

Wall outlet

120V AC 60Hz

TV back

!¢

Before connecting the external device to

the TV, remove the applicable panel cover

by squeezing the tabs in the direction of

the arrow (%) and pulling the cover.

* The power cord supplied with this product is to be used in United States and Canada only. If this product is

used in another country, use a power cord which confirms to the law or regulations of that country.

Do not remove the noise filter from the power cord. The noise filter is to reduce the interference in image or

sound of other electronic equipment.

#01E_011-014_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:52 AM12

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV back panel connections (continued)

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

ANT 1 (CABLE) IN

and

ANT 2 IN

— Two inputs that

support analog (NTSC) and digital (ATSC) off-air antenna

signals and analog and digital (QAM) Cable TV signals.

Note: If you have an antenna only, connect it to ANT 1. If you have

both cable TV and an antenna, connect the cable TV to ANT 1 and

the antenna to ANT 2.

HDMI

™

— High-Definition Multimedia Interface input

receives digital audio and uncompressed digital video from

an HDMI device or uncompressed digital video from a DVI

device. See page 22.

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

— Optical audio output in Dolby

Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) format for

connecting an external Dolby Digital decoder, amplifier,

A/V receiver, or home theater system with optical audio

input. See page 23.

G-LINK

™

— For use with one of the enclosed IR blaster/

G-LINK

™

cables to enable the TV Guide On Screen

™

recording features. See page 28.

!¡

(2) IEEE1394

— Two bi-directional digital IEEE1394 ports

for connecting multiple devices with compressed digital

video. Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be

used for playback and recording. You can control your

IEEE1394 devices using the TV’s TheaterNet on-screen

device control icons. See pages 25–26 and 50.

Note: IEEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information;

separate audio cables are not required.

!™

RJ-45 (THINC™)*

— For use when connecting Network See

page 30.

!£

CableCARD

™

slot

— For use with a digital security card and

digital cable TV service (provided by your local cable operator)

to view encrypted digital programming. See pages 15 and 56.

!¢

PC IN

— For use when connecting a personal computer

(PC). See page 29.

___________

CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.

*THINC™ System (Toshiba Home Interactive

Network Connection) -

This RJ-45 Port allows select Toshiba Cinema Series TV’s

to connect to a Desktop or Laptop PC. This revolutionary

Home Entertainment Networking System lets you access

all of the MP3 audio files or JPEG pictures stored on your

PC, using only the TV remote (without ever leaving the

couch). If your TV is connected to your audio system, you

can even use it to play back all of your MP3 audio files.

#01E_011-014_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:53 AM13

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Overview of cable types

Component video cables (red/green/blue)

Coaxial (F-type) cable

Standard A/V cables (red/white/yellow)

S-video cable

HDMI cable

Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK™ cable

(2 included)

Note: Two dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK™ cables are included with your TV. All other required

cables, if not provided with your other devices, can be purchased at many electronics accessory

suppliers.

●

Coaxial (F-type) cable is used for connecting your antenna, cable TV service, and/or

cable converter box to the ANT 1 and/or ANT 2 RF inputs on your TV.

●

Standard A/V cables (composite video) usually come in sets of three, and are for use

with video devices with standard audio and standard (composite) video output. These

cables (and the related inputs on your TV) are typically color-coded according to use:

yellow for video, red for stereo right audio, and white for stereo left (or mono) audio.

●

S-video cable is for use with video devices with S-video output. Separate audio cables

are required for a complete connection.

Note: An S-video cable provides better picture performance than a composite video cable. If

you connect an S-video cable, be sure to disconnect the standard (composite) video cable or

the picture performance will be unacceptable.

●

Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use with video devices with

component video output. (ColorStream

is Toshiba’s brand of component video.)

These cables are typically color-coded red, green, and blue. Separate audio cables are

required for a complete connection.

Note: Component video cables provide better picture performance than a standard (composite)

video or S-video cable.

●

HDMI cable is for use with devices with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface) output. HDMI cable delivers digital audio and video in its native format.

This cable carries both video and audio information; therefore, separate audio cables are

not required for a complete HDMI device connection. See page 22 for further details.

Note: HDMI cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite) video or

S-video cable.

●

IEEE1394 cable is for use with video devices with compressed digital video output

that meet CEA specifications for IEEE1394. This cable carries both video and audio

information; therefore, no separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.

See pages 25–27.

Note:

•The transmission capability of any IEEE1394 cable used with this TV must be S400

(400 Mbps maximum).

•IEEE1394 cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite)

video or S-video cable.

●

Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK

™

cable is for use with video devices with IR (infrared)

remote control. Two of these cables are included with your TV. One is for connection

to the G-LINK

™

terminal (page 28) to enable TV Guide On Screen

™

recording

features (Chapters 5 and 7). The other can be used with the TV’s IR pass-through

feature (page 24) and TheaterNet

™

on-screen device control feature (page 50).

Note: The two IR blaster/G-LINK™ cables included with your TV have specific characteristics that

allow them to work properly with this TV’s IR OUT and G-LINK™ ports. Never use other

aftermarket IR blaster or G-LINK™ cables with this TV. Other cables may not function

properly and can cause damage. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR

TOSHIBA WARRANTY.

●

Optical audio cable is for connecting receivers with Dolby Digital or PCM

(pulse-code modulation) optical audio input to the TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

terminal. See page 23.

●

RJ-45 (LAN) cable is for used to connect to the Internet. See page 30.

IEEE1394 cable (4-pin)

Optical audio cable

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

Note: Although your TV includes both HDMI

and IEEE1394 connections, it may not

operate with another device you have that

includes such a connection. For example, the

IEEE1394 ports are not intended to operate

with current model Mini DV camcorders, and

the HDMI input is not intended for

connection to a computer. Copyright

protection requirements may also prohibit or

limit connectivity. See page 22 for details

about the HDMI input. See pages 25–27 for

details about the IEEE1394 ports.

RJ-45 (LAN) cable

#01E_011-014_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:53 AM14

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

About the connection illustrations

You can connect different types and brands of devices to your TV in several different configurations. The connection illustrations in

this manual are representative of typical device connections only. The input/output terminals on your devices may differ from those

illustrated herein. For details on connecting and using your specific devices, refer to each device’s owner’s manual.

Connecting a digital CableCARD™

This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital

basic, and digital premium cable television programming by

direct connection to a cable system providing such

programming.

A security card (such as a digital CableCARD™), provided by

your cable operator, is required to view encrypted digital

programming.

Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services (such as

video-on-demand, a cable operator’s enhanced program guide,

and data-enhanced television services) will not work with the

use of a CableCARD

™

and may require the use of a separate set-

top box from your cable operator.

For more information, call your local cable operator.

You will need:

one digital CableCARD

™

(contact your cable operator)

digital cable subscription service (contact your cable

operator)



To view encrypted digital channels:

1. Connect your digital Cable TV cable to ANT 1.

2. With the front of the CableCARD

™

facing up, insert it into

the CableCARD

™

slot on the back of the TV (see

illustration below left).

3. After the CableCARD

™

is inserted, a CableCARD

™

option

appears in the Applications menu, with informational

screens provided by your digital CableCARD

™

service. See

page 56 for additional information.

From digital Cable service

(connect to ANT 1 only)

________

CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.

Note:

•Always use the EJECT button to remove the CableCARD™. Never

remove the CableCARD™ by hand.

•Never insert any object or card (including, without limitation, a

PCMCIA card) other than a CableCARD™ into the CableCARD™

slot.

•Always make sure the CableCARD™ is facing the correct direction.

•Connect the cable for your digital cable TV service to ANT 1 only.

•When using a CableCARD™, channel programming is unnecessary

because the CableCARD™ automatically loads the cable channel

list into the TV’s channel memory (page 47).

•The CableCARD™ may take up to 5 minutes to “pair” with the TV

and download channel information. CableCARD™ information and

channels will not be available until this process is completed.

TV back panel

CableCard Connected -- Acquiring

channel information.

CableCard services will only operate

with cable signal connected to Antenna 1.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Applications

TV Guide On Screen

Audio Player

Picture Viewer

Digital CC/Audio Selector

IP Service

Conditional Access

CableCARD(tm) Status

Network Setup

CableCARD(tm) Pairing

CableCARD

This cable should be connected to ANT 1 terminal directly. If you connect

the cable via a VCR, the TV may not receive the signals correctly.

CableCARD™ technology, like all new and emerging technology, may

from time to time experience compatibility issues due to the different ways

in which television manufacturers and cable system operators implement

the CableCARD™ specifications. Most issues can be easily resolved. In

the event that you experience any performance-related CableCARD™

issues with your Toshiba television, please contact the following:

•In the U.S., call TACP Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-3811 or visit

http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.

•In Canada, call TCL Customer Service at 1-800-268-3404.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:54 AM15

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

IN from ANT

VIDEO AUDIO

OUT to TV

CH 3

CH 4

OUT

OUT OUT

Signal splitter

You will need:

one signal splitter

three coaxial cables

two sets of standard A/V cables

•For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an

S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard

video cable. However, do not connect both types of video cables

to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture

performance will be unacceptable.

•If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your

VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only.



To view the antenna or Cable signal:

Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*



To view the VCR:

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source

on the TV.*

Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV (no Cable box)

From Cable TV or antenna

Stereo VCR

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television

programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

you to civil and criminal liability.



To use the TV Guide On Screen

™

recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK

™

cable according to the

instructions on page 28.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your

VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

Connecting a camcorder

You will need:

one set of standard A/V cables

• For better picture performance, if your camcorder has S-video, use an

S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard video cable.

Do not connect both an S-video cable and a standard video cable to VIDEO

3 at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable.



To view the camcorder video:

Select the VIDEO 3 video input source on the TV.*

VIDEO 3 inputs on TV

left side panel

Camcorder

______________

*To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control (see page 72).

To program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3.

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the

ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the

appropriate input mode is selected.

VIDEO AUDIO

OUT

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:54 AM16

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

You will need:

one signal splitter

five coaxial cables

two sets of standard A/V cables

• For better picture performance from your VCR: If your VCR has

S-video, connect an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead

of the standard video cable. Do not connect an S-video cable and

a standard video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time

or the picture performance will be unacceptable.

•If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your

VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only.

•When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to use the remote

control to program or access certain features on the TV.



To view basic Cable channels and use the TV’s features:

Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.* Use the

TV controls (side panel or remote control) to change

channels and access the TV’s features.



To view basic and premium Cable channels:

Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input source

on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever

channel the Cable box output is set to). Use the Cable box

controls to change channels.



To view the VCR:

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source

on the TV.*

Note: A VIDEO 1 connection with an S-Video cable (instead

of a standard video cable) will provide better picture

performance (as mentioned in the first bulleted item at the

top of this page).

_____________

*To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control

(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other

devices, see Chapter 3.

From Cable TV

Connecting a VCR and Cable box

Stereo VCR

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television

programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

you to civil and criminal liability.

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the

ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the

appropriate input mode is selected.

IN from ANT

VIDEO AUDIO

OUT to TV

CH 3

CH 4

OUT

CH 3

CH 4

Cable box

OUT OUT

Signal splitter

TV back panel



To enable the TV Guide On Screen

™

system to work

with your cable box and to use the TV Guide

On Screen

™

recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK

™

cable according to the

instructions on page 28.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your

VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:55 AM17

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

S-VIDEO

OUT VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Satellite

IN from ANT

VIDEO AUDIO

OUT to TV

CH 3

CH 4

OUT

OUT OUT

Signal splitter

Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver

You will need:

one signal splitter

four coaxial cables

one set of component video cables (if your satellite receiver

does not have component video, connect the standard A/V

cables only)

one pair of standard audio cables

three sets of standard A/V cables

•For better picture performance, if your satellite receiver and VCR

have S-video, connect S-video cables (plus the audio cables)

instead of the standard video cables. Do not connect both types of

video cables to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the

picture performance will be unacceptable.

•If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1)

to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio cable only.



To view satellite programs using the component video

connections:

Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source on the

TV.*



To view satellite programs using the standard

video connections or to record satellite programs:

Turn on all three devices. Set the VCR to the appropriate

line input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details).

Select the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV.*



To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels:

Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel you want

to watch. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the

TV.*

_____________

*To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control

(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other

devices, see Chapter 3.

From antenna

From satellite dish

Satellite receiver

Stereo VCR



To enable the TV Guide On Screen

™

recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK

™

cable according to the

instructions on page 28.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your

VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

Note: The TV Guide On Screen™ system does not receive program

listings from or for any satellite service.

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,

ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate

input mode is selected.

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television

programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

you to civil and criminal liability.

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:55 AM18

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR, and a Cable box

You will need:

one signal splitter

five coaxial cables

two sets of standard A/V cables

Note: If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV

(VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white audio

cable only.

one S-video cable

one pair of standard audio cables

Note:

•If your DVD player does not have S-video, use a standard video

cable instead. Do not connect an S-video cable and a standard

video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the

picture performance will be unacceptable.

• If your DVD player has component video, see page 20.

• Do not connect the DVD player and VCR to the same set of

A/V inputs on the TV. (See the illustration, which shows the

VCR connected to VIDEO 1 on the TV, and the DVD player

connected to VIDEO 2.)



To view basic channels and access the TV’s features:

Select the ANT 1 video input source.* Use the TV controls

to change channels and access the TV’s features.



To view premium Cable channels:

Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input source

on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever

channel the Cable box output is set to). Use the Cable box

controls to change channels.

Note: When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to

use the remote control to program or access certain features

on the TV.



To view the DVD player:

Turn ON the DVD player. Select the VIDEO 2 video

input source on the TV.*



To view the VCR:

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source

on the TV.*

_____________

*To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control

(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other

devices, see Chapter 3.

DVD player with S-video

Stereo VCR

From antenna or Cable TV

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,

ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate

input mode is selected.



To enable the TV Guide On Screen

™

recording

features:

1. Connect the G-LINK

™

cable according to the

instructions on page 28.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your

VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television

programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

subject you to civil and criminal liability.

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

IN from ANT

VIDEO AUDIO

OUT to TV

CH 3

CH 4 IN

OUT

CH 3

CH 4

Cable box

OUT OUT

Signal splitter

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:55 AM19

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

S-VIDEO

OUT VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

PBPR

IN from ANT

VIDEO AUDIO

OUT to TV

CH 3

CH 4

OUT

OUT OUT

Signal splitter

Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream® (component video) and a VCR

From antenna or Cable

Your TV has ColorStream

(component video) inputs.

You will need:

one signal splitter

three coaxial cables

two sets of standard A/V cables

•For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an

S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard

video cable. However, do not connect both types of video cables

to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture

performance will be unacceptable.

•If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV

(VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out terminal using the white

audio cable only.

one pair of standard audio cables

one set of component video cables

•You can connect the component video cables (plus audio

cables) from the DVD player to either set of ColorStream

terminals on the TV (HD-1 or HD-2). The ColorStream HD-1

and HD-2 terminals can be used with Progressive (480p,

720p) and Interlaced (480i, 1080i) scan systems. A 1080i

signal will provide the best picture performance.

•If your DVD player does not have component video, see page

19. If your DVD player has HDMI video, see page 22.



To view antenna or Cable channels:

Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*



To view the DVD player:

Turn ON the DVD player. Select the ColorStream HD-1

video input source on the TV.*



To view the VCR:

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input

source on the TV.*



To record a TV program while watching a DVD:

Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel to

record. Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source

on the TV* to view the DVD.

_____________

*To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control

(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other

devices, see Chapter 3.

DVD player with component video

Stereo VCR

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television

programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

you to civil and criminal liability.



To enable the TV Guide On Screen

™

recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK

™

cable according to the

instructions on page 28.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your

VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the ANT 1,

ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when the appropriate

input mode is selected.

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:56 AM20

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

IN from ANT

VIDEO AUDIO

OUT to TV

CH 3 LR

CH 4 IN

OUT

IN from ANT

VIDEO AUDIO

OUT to TV

CH 3

CH 4 IN

OUT

OUT OUT

Signal splitter

Connecting two VCRs

You will need:

one signal splitter

three coaxial cables

two sets of standard A/V cables

•For better picture performance, if VCR 1 has S-video, use

an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the

standard video cable. However, do not connect both types

of video cables to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time

or the picture performance will be unacceptable.

•If VCR 1 has mono audio, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1)

to the audio out terminal on VCR 1 using the white audio cable

only.

•Do not connect the same VCR to the output and input terminals on

the TV at the same time.



To view the antenna or Cable signal:

Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*



To view VCR 1:

Turn ON VCR 1. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source

on the TV.*



To dub or edit from VCR 1 to VCR 2:

Turn ON both VCRs. Set VCR 2 to the appropriate line

input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details). Select

the VIDEO 1 video input source on the TV.*

Note:

•If you have a Cable box, connect the Cable box and splitter to VCR1

as shown on page 17.

•The VIDEO OUT signal incorporates Macrovision

protection technology, which may prevent you from recording certain

copy-restricted video materials.***

The VIDEO OUT terminal does not output the POP picture.

When POP mode is active, the AUDIO OUT terminals output the

sound of the active window (main or POP). For additional

information, see “Notes about recording” on page 81.

VCR1 (plays)

From antenna or Cable

VCR2 (records)

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television

programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

you to civil and criminal liability.

*** This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by

U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection

technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other

limited pay-per-view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.

Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision is a registered

trademark of Macrovision Corporation.



To enable the TV Guide On Screen

™

recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK

™

cable according to the

instructions on page 28.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your

VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the

ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals when

the appropriate input mode is selected.

_________________________________________________________________

*To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control

(see page 72). To program the TV remote control to operate other

devices, see Chapter 3.

** Do not connect the unit through a VCR. Video signals fed through VCRs may be

affected by copyright protection systems and the picture will be distorted on the TV.

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:56 AM21

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

The HDMI

[1]

input on your TV receives digital audio and

uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device or

uncompressed digital video from a DVI

[2]

device.

This input is designed to accept HDCP

[3]

program material in

digital form from EIA/CEA-861/861B–compliant

[4]

consumer

electronic devices (such as a set-top box or DVD player with

HDMI or DVI output).

The HDMI input is designed for best performance with 720p

signals but will also accept and display 1080i, 480i, and 480p

signals.

Connecting an HDMI™ or a DVI device to the HDMI input

__________________________________________________________________

[1]

HDMI = High-Definition Multimedia Interface.

[2]

DVI = Digital Video Interface.

[3]

HDCP = High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection.

[4]

EIA/CEA-861/861B compliance covers the transmission of

uncompressed digital video with high-bandwidth digital content

protection, which is being standardized for reception of high-definition

video signals. Because this is an evolving technology, it is possible that

some devices may not operate properly with the TV.

Note: To ensure that the HDMI or DVI device is reset

properly, it is recommended that you follow these

procedures:

•When turning on your electronic components, turn on

the TV first, and then the HDMI or DVI device.

•When turning off your electronic components, turn off

the HDMI or DVI device first, and then the TV.

To connect a DVI device, you will need:

•one HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable (HDMI type A

connector) per DVI device

For proper operation, the length of an HDMI-to-DVI adapter

cable should not exceed 9.8 ft (3m). The recommended length

is 6.6 ft (2m).

•one pair of standard analog audio cables per DVI

device

An HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable transfers video only.

Separate analog audio cables are required (see

illustration below).

See “Setting the HDMI audio mode” on page 55.

___________

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or

registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

DVI device

VIDEO AUDIO

OUT

DVI/HDCP

OUT

TV back panel

NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV

TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).

THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.

OUT

HDMI

OUT

VIDEO AUDIO

HDMI device

To connect an HDMI device, you will need:

•one HDMI cable (type A connector) per HDMI

device

For proper operation, it is recommended that you use as

short an HDMI cable as possible.

HDMI cable transfers both video and audio. Separate

analog audio cables are not required (see illustration

below). Some CDVs (video CDs) may not output digital

audio signals. In that case, you may hear sound by

connecting analog audio cables.

See “Setting the HDMI audio mode” on page 55.

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:57 AM22

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Connecting a digital audio system

This connection allows you to use external speakers with an

external audio amplifier to adjust the sound level.

You will need:

one pair of standard audio cables

To control the audio:

Turn on the TV and the stereo amplifier.

Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers (see “Turning off the built-in

speakers” on page 93).

Note: To hear sound when using an external audio amplifier,

the volume of both the TV and the amplifier must be set to a

reasonable listening level.

Analog audio amplifier

Connecting an analog audio system

The TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs a Dolby

Digital or 2-channel down-mixed PCM (pulse-code

modulation) signal for use with an external Dolby Digital

decoder or other external audio system with optical audio input.

You will need:

one optical audio cable (Use an optical audio cable that has

the larger “TosLink” connector and not the smaller

“mini-optical” connector.)

To control the audio:

Turn on the TV and the digital audio device.

Press MENU on the TV’s remote control and open the AUDIO

menu.

Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

In the Optical Output Format field, select either Dolby Digital

or PCM, depending on your

device (see “Selecting the

optical audio output format”

on page 93).

Audio Setup

MTS Stereo

Language English

Reset Done

Speakers On

Optical Output Format

Dolby Digital

Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers in the same Audio Setup

menu (above). Also see “Turning off the built-in speakers” on

page 93.

Dolby Digital decoder or

other digital audio system

Note:

•Some audio systems may not be compatible with Dolby Digital bitstream

signals. Older audio systems that are not compatible with standard

optical out signals may not work properly, creating a high noise level that

may damage speakers or headphones. THIS DAMAGE IS NOT

COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.

•The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs signals only when receiving

digital broadcasts with the TV in single-window mode.

•The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal may not output some digital audio

sources because of copy restrictions.

Audio Settings

Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup

Audio

LINE IN

Optical

Audio IN

LINE IN

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:58 AM23

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

For additional control options for

your home theater system, set up

the TheaterNet on-screen device

control feature. You can use this

feature to control many IR

remote-controlled devices and

IEEE1394 devices using the on-

screen control icons.

See pages 50–54 for details on setting

up and using TheaterNet.

See pages 25–27 for details on

connecting IEEE1394 devices.

You can use the TV’s IR OUT terminal (infrared pass-through)

to remotely operate (through the TV) many infrared remote-

controlled devices (such as a Toshiba infrared remote-controlled

VCR or DVD player) enclosed within an entertainment center

or similar cabinet. Without the IR OUT connection, the device

typically would need to be visible to operate it remotely.

You will need:

one dual-wand IR blaster cable (included with your TV)

other audio/video cables as required to connect the device(s)

to the TV (see pages 15–30)

To connect the IR blaster cable:

1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your device. This

sensor is marked on some devices.*

2. Align one of the IR blaster cable’s wands about 1 inch away

from the infrared sensor on the front of the device and

attach it using double-sided mounting tape. If you have a

second device, attach the second wand in a similar manner.

(See illustration at right.)

Note: If you do not have a second device, coil the second wand

with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV.

3. Plug the IR blaster cable’s plug into one of the TV’s

TheaterNet OUT terminals.

Controlling infrared remote-controlled devices through the TV (IR pass-through)

To control the device(s):

Point the TV remote control

(programmed to operate the device; see

Chapter 3) or the device’s remote

control at the front of the TV and press

the button for the desired function.

The signal passes from the remote

control through the TV to the device

via the IR blaster cable.

Note:

•If you use the device’s remote control to

operate the device, you also will need to

use the TV’s remote control to operate

the TV.

•For additional control options, see “TheaterNet on-screen device

control” at right.

TheaterNet

™

on-screen device control

Note: The TheaterNet on-screen icons are the only device functions

available when the icons are on-screen. To access other device

functions, close the TheaterNet icon window.

If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor:

1. Turn OFF the device.

2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the

device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the

front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote

control for this step.)

3. If the device turns on, the point at which the remote control touched

the device is the location of the sensor.

4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the

right and press POWER again.

5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor.

ENTER

EXITTOP MENU

Toshiba Video 3

Front of IR-controlled DVD player (for example)

Front of IR-controlled audio device (for example)

Infrared

sensor

IR blaster cable wand

(approx. 1 inch from device)

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:58 AM24

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Connecting IEEE1394 video devices

You can use the two bi-directional IEEE1394 ports on the back

of your TV to connect digital video devices that meet CEA

specifications for IEEE1394.

Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be used for both

playback and recording.

•Because IEEE1394 is an evolving technology, it is possible that some

or all of the connectivity features of a device you connect to the TV

through the IEEE1394 ports may not operate. You should confirm

that the devices you want to use with the IEEE1394 ports will operate

with those ports.

•This TV does not support all possible IEEE1394 signal types. For

information on signals supported by the IEEE1394 ports, see

“Supported signals” at right.

•IEEE1394 cable carries both audio and video information;

separate audio cables are not required.

You will need:

one (or two) IEEE1394 cable(s)

Note: The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this

TV must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum).

additional A/V cables if your device is analog-compatible

(see “Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices” below).

Two bi-directional IEEE1394 ports

Using analog-compatible IEEE1394

devices

Some digital IEEE1394 devices are compatible with analog

signals. For example, some D-VHS VCRs can record and play

VHS or S-VHS format videos. Such devices allow you to play

analog tapes that you rented or recorded, or record analog

programs from antenna or Cable TV systems. To use the

IEEE1394 device’s analog features, you need to connect the

device to the TV using standard A/V cables (or S-video plus

audio cables) in addition to connecting the IEEE1394 cable.

Note: If you have an IEEE1394 device connected to both digital

and analog inputs on the TV, the TV automatically switches

between digital and analog modes, as needed, when the initial

device access is initiated using the TheaterNet button.

See page 50 for details on using the TheaterNet feature.

Supported signals

The IEEE1394 ports support only the signals listed below.

Even though incompatible video, audio, and digital control

signals cannot be decoded by the TV, these signals may be

passed through the IEEE1394 cable to other compatible devices.

Incompatible devices may not appear in the TheaterNet

™

menu.

•MPEG-2 digital video signals

Other digital video signals—such as DV video—are

incompatible and must be decoded by the source device and

sent to the TV as analog video (composite or S-video).

•Dolby Digital and MPEG digital audio signals

Other digital audio signals (such as DPM, MP3, and DTS) are

incompatible and cannot be decoded by the TV.

•EIA-775 and AV/C digital control

Your TV can serve as the control center for many devices

that are compatible with EIA-775 or AV/C IEEE1394

control standards (described below).

The TV cannot control IEEE1394 devices that use any other

control standards.

–EIA-775 digital control allows tuning devices (such as

Cable boxes) to send simple graphics; however, this

standard does not allow the TV to control the Cable box

through IEEE1394.

–AV/C (audio/video control) provides basic control (such

as power, play, stop rewind, fast-forward, pause, and

record), as applicable to the specific device.

Using TheaterNet

™

on-screen device

control

You can use the TheaterNet feature to control some IEEE1394

devices using on-screen control icons. See page 50 for details on

setting up and using the TheaterNet feature.

Note: If the TheaterNet feature does not control your

IEEE1394 device, you can either use the device’s remote

control or try using IR pass-through with the TV’s remote

control (page 24).

TV back panel

From IEEE1394 devices

(such as AVHD or D-VHS)

{

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:59 AM25

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Connecting IEEE1394 video devices (continued)

IEEE1394 device initialization

When you connect a new IEEE1394 device to the TV and turn

it on, the device immediately announces its presence to the TV

(and other networked IEEE1394 devices, if any), and the

following device initialization screen automatically appears.

Note: With some devices, it may take up to one minute for this

screen to appear.

1. If you also connected your IEEE1394 device to an analog

input, use the

yzx •

buttons to select the input in the

Analog Input Used field; otherwise, leave it set to “None.”

(See “Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices” on page

25.)

2. If you want to label the device, highlight Edit Label and

press ENTER.

New IEEE1394 Device Initilization

Manufacturer

Device Type

Custom Label

TOSHIBA

AVHD

Edit Label Done

3. Press the

yzx •

buttons to select a character for the first

space and then press ENTER.

4. Repeat step 3 to enter the rest of the characters.

5. Highlight Done and press ENTER to save the information.

IEEE1394 Device Label Edit

Cancel Done

ABCDEFG

HI JKLMN

OPQRSTU

VWX Y Z 0 1

2345678

SPC CLR BS

MY DEVICE_

Note:

•The TV may not recognize incompatible or non-A/V IEEE1394

devices; however, these devices may still be available to other

compatible IEEE1394 devices on the network.

•You may be able to use the TV’s remote control to operate some

compatible IEEE1394 devices. You must first program the

remote control to recognize the device (see Chapter 3). If you

have an IEEE1394 Cable box or satellite receiver, you may need

to use the remote control that came with the device.

•Toshiba is not liable for the operation of any IEEE1394 device

other than the Toshiba Symbio AVHD recorder.

Connecting an AVHD (external hard

drive) or D-VHS digital recorder

You can connect an IEEE1394 compatible D-VHS or AVHD

(audio/video hard drive) digital recorder (such as Toshiba’s

Symbio

™

AVHD Recorder) to record high definition and

standard definition material from either tuner and control live

TV (pause, rewind, etc.).

When you connect a D-VHS or AVHD device to the TV:

•The remote control keys (Live, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, FF, etc.) are

automatically activated to allow control of live TV.

•The TV Guide On Screen

™

system is automatically configured to

allow recording to the device.* See Chapters 5 and 7 for details.

Also see page 52 for details on setting the AVHD device skip time.

•Some programs may not be recorded due to copy protection

restrictions.

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television

programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

you to civil and criminal liability.

* Note:

To enjoy the full benefits of your Symbio AVHD Recorder, you

must first set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (see Chapter 5).

Full Symbio AVHD Recorder benefits, including Intelligent One Touch

recording, will not be available unless the TV Guide On Screen™

system is fully operational. However, when the TV Guide On Screen™

system is not fully operational, manual recording is available as long

as the TV Guide On Screen™ system has acquired the necessary date

and time data. If you experience any issues with your Symbio AVHD

Recorder, please contact the following:

•In the U.S., call TACP Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-3811 or visit

http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.

•In Canada, call TCL Customer Service at 1-800-268-3404.

This TV is compatible with the new Toshiba

Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder!

Toshiba’s Symbio™ AVHD Recorder is designed specifically for

high definition television (HDTV) and offers control over digital

video recording and playback.

Think of it as a “tapeless VCR” for digital television. You can

pause, rewind, or use instant replay, so you’ll never miss a thing!

Symbio also offers one-touch recording* of both standard and

High Definition programs through the no-fee TV Guide

On Screen™ interactive program guide built in to this TV.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 8:59 AM26

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Connecting IEEE1394 video devices (continued)

Important information regarding IEEE1394

device interconnection

•Never loop the last device in the chain back to the TV.

If the device chain is looped, the TV may not work properly with the

other devices in the chain.

•Always place devices with the slowest communication

speed at the end of each chain. If a device with a slower

communication speed is placed ahead of a faster device in the

chain, the signal from the slower device will interfere with the signal

from the faster device. To determine the communication speed of

an IEEE1394 device, look for an “S” number near the device’s

IEEE1394 connector. The higher the “S” number, the faster the

device. If your device is not marked with an “S” number, look in the

device’s user manual or call the device manufacturer’s technical

support number.

•If your IEEE1394 device has a two-position power

switch, always place the device at the end of the chain

and turn ON the power switch when any device is used.

If the power switch is OFF, it will interfere with signals from devices

behind it in the chain.

•The maximum length for an IEEE1394 cable between

each device is 15 feet.

•This TV is an IEEE1394A device. The IEEE1394B protocol is faster

and intended to allow for longer distances between devices and

multi-room systems. IEEE1394A–to–IEEE1394B converters

(available at some electronics suppliers) may allow compatibility of

IEEE1394B devices with your existing IEEE1394A devices.

•The transmission capability of IEEE1394 cable used with this TV

must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum).

IEEE1394 device management

The IEEE1394 device information is saved in the TV’s memory.

You can edit this device information (for example, edit the

device name, change the analog input information, or delete the

device information from the TV’s memory if you no longer use

that device).

To edit the IEEE1394 device information:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 3 below).

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

Setup

3. Open the Devices menu, highlight IEEE1394 Devices, and

press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

IEEE1394 Devices

TheaterNet Devices

Devices

4. Highlight the device you want to edit and press ENTER.

IEEE1394 Device Management

Reset

Done

TOSHIBA AVHD None No

Brand Type Label Analog Input Used Connected

MY DEVICE

5. Follow the on-screen prompts to modify the device

information.

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:00 AM27

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

After you connect your devices to the TV, you will need to connect the G-LINK

™

cable (either of the dual-wand IR blaster cables

included with your TV) from your VCR and Cable box (if applicable) to the G-LINK

™

terminal on the TV.

Note: TV Guide On Screen™ program data is available through the ANT-1 and ANT-2 antenna inputs and also through the VIDEO 1 inputs if you

have a cable box connected to VIDEO 1. TV Guide On Screen™ program data is not available through any other inputs on this TV. See the

connection information on pages 15–30.

The G-LINK

™

connection is necessary to enable the following features of your TV Guide On Screen

™

system:

•If you have a Cable box, you need to connect the G-LINK

™

cable from the Cable box to the G-LINK

™

terminal to receive the

TV Guide On Screen

™

program listings for your Cable service.

•If you have a VCR, you need to connect the G-LINK

™

cable from the VCR to the G-LINK

™

terminal to use the TV Guide

On Screen

™

recording features.

G-LINK™ connection

•This connection is necessary for the TV Guide On Screen™ system to work with your cable box to receive program listings and to

enable the TV Guide On Screen™ recording features with your VCR.

•This connection is not necessary for AVHD or D-VHS recording devices. See pages 26 and 55 for further details.

If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor:

1. Turn OFF the device.

2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the

device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the

front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote

control for this step.)

3. If the device turns on, the point at which the remote control touched

the device is the location of the sensor.

4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the

right and press POWER again.

5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor.

To connect to the G-LINK

™

terminal:

1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your VCR or

Cable box. The sensor is marked on some devices.*

2. Align one of the G-LINK

™

(IR blaster) cable’s wands about

1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the

VCR and attach it using double-sided mounting tape.

If you have a Cable box, attach the other wand in a similar

manner. (See illustration at right.)

Note: If you do not have a Cable box, coil the second wand

with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV.

3. Plug the G-LINK

™

(IR blaster) cable’s plug into the TV’s

G-LINK

™

terminal.

For details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen

™

system:

See Chapter 5.

For details on using the TV Guide On Screen

™

interactive

program guide:

See Chapter 7.

Front of Cable box

Front of VCR

Infrared

sensor

G-LINK™ (IR blaster) cable wand

(approx. 1 inch from device)

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:00 AM28

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

1115

610 15

Pin assignment for RGB/PC

terminal

Connecting a personal computer (PC)

This connection allows you to view the image of a personal

computer (PC) on the TV screen. When connecting a PC to the

TV, use an analog RGB (15-pin) computer cable and a PC

audio cable.

–To use a PC, set the monitor output resolution on the PC

before connecting it to the TV. The following signals can be

displayed.

•VGA: 640 × 480 @ 60Hz

•SVGA: 800 × 600 @ 60Hz

•XGA: 1024 × 768 @ 60Hz

Other formats or non-standard signals may not be displayed

correctly.

–To display the optimum picture, use the PC setting feature.

(see “Using the PC setting feature” on page 95).

Note:

•Some PC models cannot be connected to this TV.

•An adapter is not needed for computers with a DOS/V compatible mini

D-sub 15-pin terminal.

•Depending on the DVD’s title and the specifications of the PC on which

you are playing the DVD-Video, some scenes may be skipped or you

may not be able to pause during multi-angle scenes.

Conversion

adapter

(if necessary)

Audio cable

Audio

output

Computer

Pin No. Signal name

4NC (not connected)

5NC

6Ground

7Ground

8Ground

9NC

10 Ground

11 NC

12 NC

13 H-sync

14 V-sync

15 NC

Signal names for mini D-sub 15 pin

connector

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:01 AM29

Black

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Connecting a home network

Example #1: Networking via DSL modem service

You will need:

three telephone cables

three RJ-45 cables

one telephone cable splitter

one RJ-45 router

one DSL modem

Networking the TV with your home Internet e-mail service to enable remote

scheduling of recordings and reminders

You can network the TV with your home Internet service to remotely schedule recordings and reminders by sending an e-mail to the

TV.

To use this feature, you must have Internet e-mail service in your home and two separate e-mail addresses (your personal e-mail

address and a second e-mail address for use solely by the TV). Contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) for these services.

Note:

•This feature is only for remotely scheduling recordings and reminders. You will not be able to access the Internet through the TV.

•To configure your TV for remote scheduling, see Chapter 11

[1] Telephone cable

[2] RJ-45 cable

[3] Coaxial cable

To T V ( ANT IN or via

Cable Box or VCR)

Cable modem Router

Coaxial cable jack

[2]

[3]

TV back panel

Telephone cable splitter

To telephone

Phone jack

DSL modem Router

[1]

[2]

Example #2: Networking via cable modem service

You will need:

three coaxial cables

three RJ-45 cables

one coaxial cable splitter

one RJ-45 router

one cable modem

Coaxial cable splitter

[3]

TV back panel

#01E_015-030_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:01 AM30

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Using the remote control

Note: The error message “Not

Available” will appear if you press a

key for a function that is not available

The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here. For a

complete list of the remote control’s functions, see the remote control

functional key chart on pages 34–35.

For a list of the buttons that operate the TV Guide On Screen

™

system, see

page 59.

POWER

turns the TV on and off.

SLEEP

accesses the sleep timer (page 94).

LIGHT

The first press of the LIGHT button lights the keypad and turns on

the Illumination mode. With the Illumination mode on, pressing any key

lights the keypad for 5 seconds (10 seconds if you’re in programming

mode). Subsequent presses of the LIGHT button toggle between turning

the Illumination mode on and off.

Channel Numbers (0–9, –/100)

directly tune channels. The “–” button is used

to tune digital channels (page 76) or to display the favorite channel list

(page 49).

INPUT

selects the video input source (page 72).

MODE

cycles through the six remote control device modes: TV, CBL/SAT,

VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO1, and AUDIO2. The mode indicator light will

remain lit for a few seconds (page 33).

PIC SIZE

cycles through the five pictures sizes: Natural, TheaterWide 1/2/3,

and Full (page 77).

TheaterNet™ DEVICE

displays a list of available TheaterNet devices (page 50).

TheaterNet™ CTRL

accesses the on-screen IR device control icons (page 51).

accesses the main TV menu system (pages 40 and 41) or opens a

menu in the TV Guide On Screen

™

system (Chapter 7).

TV GUIDE

opens the TV Guide On Screen

™

system (Chapter 7).

INFO

provides detailed information on highlighted items in the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system (Chapter 7).

ENTER

activates highlighted items in the main menu system and the

TV Guide On Screen

™

system.

Arrow buttons (yz x •)

When a menu is on-screen, these buttons select or

adjust programming menus. (Also see x / • on the next page.)

CH yz

cycles through programmed channels when no menu is on-screen

(page 47) and functions as page up/down when a menu is on-screen or

when the TV Guide On Screen

™

system is open (Chapter 7).

VOL yz

adjusts the volume level.

EXIT

closes on-screen menus and the TV Guide On Screen

™

system.

Learning about the remote control

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:02 AM31

Black

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

CH RTN

returns to the last viewed channel (page 76), or stops the picture viewer slide show

(page 103).

Live

returns viewing of the TV back to the live program, while continuing to record to the

Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD recorder (pages 26 and 55).

RECALL

displays TV setting information on-screen (page 97).

MUTE

reduces or turns off the sound (page 90).

TV/VCR

selects TV mode to view one program while recording another.

SKIP SS|

and

|TT

jump forward and backward one day in the TV Guide On Screen

™

listings (Chapter 7).

LIST

displays the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD recorder play list (if available) (page 26).

FAV CH yz

tunes to the next higher/lower favorite channel (page 49).

HOME ( )

accesses the home function of the channel browser feature (page 75)

x / •

While watching TV, these buttons open the channel browser banner and tune

to the previous/next channel in the channel history (page 75). (Also see “Arrow buttons”

on previous page.)

SPLIT

turns the POP feature on and off (page 81) or locks/unlocks the TV Guide On Screen

™

video window.

PIC MODE

selects the picture mode (page 84).

FAV SCAN

accesses the favorite channel search function (page 83).

FREEZE

accesses the freeze feature (page 83).

Learning about the remote control (continued)

For optimum performance, aim the remote control directly at the TV and make sure there

is no obstruction between the remote control and the TV.

Point remote control

toward remote sensor

on front of TV.

Remote control effctive range

16.4 ft (5m)

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:03 AM32

Black

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

MODE Device mode control after programming

1) TV Toshiba TV

2) CBL/SAT

3) VCR/PVR

4) DVD Multi-brand video/audio devices

5) AUDIO 1

6) AUDIO 2

Note:

Although your new TV’s remote control includes

codes for many devices, it may not include

codes for some or all of the features on certain

devices you wish to control. If you are unable to

program the TV’s remote control to operate

your device or some of the features on that

device, use the device’s remote control or the

controls on the device.

MODE

Your TV remote control has one dedicated TV mode and five programmable

multi-brand modes: CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, and AUDIO 2. The

default device modes and programmable device modes are listed below.

Note: The TV remote control is preprogrammed to operate most Toshiba devices. If

you own a non-Toshiba device or a Toshiba device that the remote control is not

preprogrammed to operate, you will need to program the remote control. See

“Programming the remote control to operate your other devices” on page 36.

MODE Default device mode control (before programming)

1) TV Toshiba TV

2) CBL/SAT Toshiba Satellite receiver

3) VCR/PVR Toshiba VCR

4) DVD Toshiba DVD

5) AUDIO 1 Pioneer Audio receiver

6) AUDIO 2 Pioneer LD

Using the remote control MODE button to control your other devices

To install the remote control batteries:

Caution: Always dispose of batteries in a designated disposal location. Never

throw batteries into a fire.

1. Slide the battery cover off the back of the remote control.

2. Install two “AA” size alkaline batteries. Match the + and – symbols on

the batteries to the symbols on the battery compartment.

3. Slide the battery cover on to the remote control until the lock snaps.

Installing the remote control batteries

You can directly select the device mode by pressing the corresponding

number button (1-6) while pressing the MODE button.

Number (1-6)

Caution:

Never throw batteries into a fire.

Note:

•Be sure to use AA size batteries.

•Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.

•Batteries should always be disposed of with the

environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in

accordance with applicable laws and regulations.

•If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if

the operating range becomes reduced, replace

batteries with new ones.

•When necessary to replace batteries in the remote

control, always replace both batteries with new ones.

Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries

in combination.

•Always remove batteries from remote control if they

are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for

an extended period of time. This will prevent battery

acid from leaking into the battery compartment.

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:03 AM33

Black

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Remote Control functional key chart

Key Label Toshiba TV Cable Satellite VCR DVD/LD Receiver CD PVR

(TV) (CBL/SAT) (CBL/SAT) (AUDIO) (AUDIO) (VCR)

MODE Remote control device mode selection

LIGHT Lights the remote key, and toggles between enabled and disabled Illumination mode.*

SLEEP Sleep timer --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

POWER Power Power Power Power Power Power Power Power

1Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 Digit 1 AV input 1 Digit 1 Digit 1

2Digit 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 Digit 2 AV input 2 Digit 2 Digit 2

3Digit 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 Digit 3 AV input 3 Digit 3 Digit 3

4Digit 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 Digit 4 AV input 4 Digit 4 Digit 4

5Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 Digit 5 CD Digit 5 Digit 5

6Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Digit 6 Tuner Digit 6 Digit 6

7Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Digit 7 Phono Digit 7 Digit 7

8Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Digit 8 Cassette Digit 8 Digit 8

9Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Digit 9 Aux Digit 9 Digit 9

0Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 Digit 0 --- Digit 0, 10 Digit 0

100/–– (digital --- – (sub 100 +10 --- --- ---

- separator) channel)

INPUT TV/Video TV TV TV TV TV TV TV

select

PIC SIZE Selects the TV TV TV TV TV TV TV

image shape.

MENU/ Menu/ --- Action, --- Menu --- --- Menu

ACTION Guide Menu Menu

TV GUIDE/SETUP

TV Guide --- Guide --- DVD setup --- --- Guide

INFO/TITLE Guide Info --- INFO --- TITLE= --- --- INFO

Top menu

TheaterNet

--- --- --- Subtitle --- ---

ADVANCE

DEVICE/SUB TITLE

Device

TheaterNet

--- --- --- Audio --- --- ---

CTRL/AUDIO

Control

ENTER Enter --- Enter, Select --- Enter --- --- Enter

yMenu select --- Menu select --- Menu select --- --- Menu select

up up up up

zMenu select --- Menu select --- Menu select --- --- Menu select

down down down down

x •Menu select --- Menu select --- Menu select --- --- Menu select

left/right left/right left/right left/right

EXIT/ Exit --- Exit --- DVD clear --- --- EXIT

DVD CLEAR

CH yz Channel Channel Channel Channel --- Channel --- Channel

PAGE +/–up/down, up/down up/down up/down up/down up/down

Page up/down

VOL yz Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume

up/down*2up/down*2up/down*2up/down*2up/down*2up/down*2up/down*2up/down*2

CH RTN/ Previous Previous Previous --- DVD --- --- ---

DVD RTN channel channel channel return

Live Live --- --- --- --- --- --- Live TV

RECALL On-screen

--- --- ---

On-screen --- --- ---

display display

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:04 AM34

Black

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Remote Control functional key chart (continued)

Key Label Toshiba TV Cable Satellite VCR DVD/LD Receiver CD PVR

(TV) (CBL/SAT) (CBL/SAT) (AUDIO) (AUDIO) (VCR)

MUTE

Sound mute*

SLOW

------ ------ ------ Slow FWD Slow FWD ------ ------ Slow FWD

•

--- Slow REW ---

SKIP

xSkip FWD

------ ------ ------ Skip FWD ------ Skip FWD ------

•Skip REW

Skip REW Skip REW

REW Rewind --- --- Rewind Rewind

---

Rewind Rewind

PAUSE/STEP Pause --- --- Pause Pause

---

Pause Pause

PLAY Play --- --- Play Play

---

Play Play

FF Fast FWD --- --- Fast FWD Fast FWD --- Fast FWD Fast FWD

TV/VCR

--- ---

TV/SAT TV/VCR --- --- --- Reverse

DISC/AM/FM --- --- --- --- Disc shift AM/FM Disc shift Replay

STOP Stop

--- ---

Stop Stop --- Stop Stop

REC REC Menu --- --- Record --- --- --- Record

(Single Click)

(Double Click) (Double Click)

LIST LIST

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

FAV CH

FAV channel --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

up/down

HOME HOME --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

SPLIT

Split

TV TV TV TV TV TV TV

PIC MODE PIC MODE TV TV TV TV TV TV TV

FAV SCAN FAV SCAN --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

FREEZE

Freeze

TV TV TV TV TV TV TV

Note:

•“---” = key does not send a signal.

•“ TV” = key will operate the TV.

Backlight key is toggle. Does not send IR signal.

Volume will punch through to TV by default. When the volume is unlocked, all the devices will have their own volume if their ID has

volume data. The AUDIO modes (receiver, CD) will have their own volume if volume lock is done to TV, CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, or DVD

mode. See “Using the volume lock feature” on page 37.

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:04 AM35

Black

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Programming the remote control to operate your other devices

Searching and sampling the code of

a device (8500)

If you do not know the device code for a particular device, you

can cycle the remote control through the available codes for that

device mode and sample the functions to find the code that

operates the target device. The keys available to be sampled,

provided they are applicable to that mode, are POWER, 1,

VOL y, CH y, and PLAY. Invalid keys will be ignored while in

program mode.

To cycle through each available device code and sample its

functions:

1. Press MODE to select the mode you want to set up.

2. While holding down RECALL, press 8 – 5 – 0 – 0. The

remote control will enter program mode.

3. Point the remote control at the target device and press

POWER (or other function buttons that are available to be

sampled).

4. If the device responds to the remote control:

Press RECALL to store the device code. The mode

indicator will blink twice and the remote control will exit

the program mode.

If the device does not respond to the remote control:

Press y, and then press POWER. Repeat this step until

the device responds to the remote control, and then press

RECALL.

Note: When a search cycle is completed, the mode

indicator will blink three times. The remote control will

begin to cycle through the available codes again. If no

key is pressed within 10 seconds while programming, the

remote control will exit the program mode and return to

the previous code.

Device code setup

1. Refer to the multi-brand remote control device code table

on pages 38 and 39 to find the code for the brand of your

device.

If more than one code is listed, try each one separately until

you find one that works.

2. Press MODE until the Mode indicator for the device

(CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2) lights

up.

3. While holding down the RECALL button, press the

Channel Number buttons to enter the four-digit code for

your brand of device. If a valid code is entered, the mode

indicator will blink twice. If an invalid code is entered, the

mode indicator will blink one long blink.

4. Point the remote control at the device and press POWER to

test the code.

If the device responds to the remote control:

You have entered the correct code.

If the device does not respond to the remote control:

You may have entered the wrong code. Repeat steps 3

and 4 using another code.

Note: In addition to POWER, confirm that all necessary keys

on the TV remote control operate your device. If some keys

are not operational, repeat the device code setup using

another code (if other codes are listed for your device). If,

after trying all listed codes, the necessary keys do not operate

your device, use the device’s original remote control.

5. To control the TV, repeatedly press MODE to select “TV.”

Note:

•Although the TV remote control includes codes for many devices, it may

not include codes for some or all of the features on certain devices you

want to control. If you are unable to program the TV remote control to

operate your device or some of the features on that device, use the

device’s remote control or the controls on the device.

•Each time you change the batteries you will need to reprogram the

remote control.

•Some newer VCRs respond to either of two codes. These VCRs have a

switch labeled “VCR1/VCR2.” If your VCR has this kind of switch and

does not respond to the codes for your VCR brand, set the switch to the

other position (“VCR1” or “VCR2”) and reprogram the remote control.

POWER

Numbers

MODE

VOL y

RECALL

CH y

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:04 AM36

Black

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Numbers

MODE

VOL yz

Programming the remote control to operate your other devices (continued)

RECALL

Operational feature reset (8900)

This feature clears all programmed features not related to

“Device code setup” and resets the Volume Lock to “TV.”

To reset the features:

While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 –9 –0 –

0. The Mode indicator will blink two times, and then pause

and blink two more times.

Using the volume lock feature (8000)

For the TV, CABLE/SAT, VCR, and DVD modes, the volume

controls (VOL yz and MUTE) can be locked to the selected

device mode. This feature does not apply to the AUDIO 1 and

AUDIO 2 modes.

To lock the volume controls to always control the

CABLE/SAT device volume (for example):

1. Repeatedly press MODE to select CABLE/SAT mode.

2. While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 – 0 – 0 – 0.

3. Press VOL y.

The CABLE/SAT mode light will blink two times (locked).

To reset the volume controls to the original device mode:

1. While holding down RECALL, press 8 – 0 – 0 – 0.

2. Press VOL z.

The mode light will blink four times (unlocked).

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:05 AM37

Black

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Multi-brand remote control device codes

ADMIRAL 0135

AIWA 0127, 0132, 0181

AKAI 0129, 0114, 0115,

0116

AUDIO DYNAMIC 0139, 0111

BELL&HOWELL 0105, 0113

BROKSONIC 0120, 0126, 0180

CANON 0123, 0125

CCE 0143

CITIZEN 0106

CRAIG 0105, 0129, 0106

CURTIS MATHES 0145, 0124, 0127

DAEWOO 0143, 0101, 0124,

0175

DBX 0139, 0110, 0111

DIMENSIA 0145

EMERSON 0143, 0126, 0119,

0103, 0125, 0142,

0120, 0118

FISHER 0105, 0108, 0109,

0107, 0113, 0165

FUNAI 0127, 0126, 0120,

0134

GE 0133, 0145, 0124

GO VIDEO 0137, 0151, 0163,

0149, 0150, 0182

GOLDSTAR 0106

GRADIENTE 0170, 0171, 0168,

0134, 0156

HITACHI 0123, 0145, 0100,

0127, 0168

INSTANT REPLAY 0124, 0123

JENSEN 0139

JVC 0139, 0110, 0111,

0134, 0157, 0158,

0184, 0185, 7104

KENWOOD 0139, 0110, 0106,

0111

LG 0159

LXI 0127, 0106, 0100,

0107, 0108, 0105,

0109

MAGNAVOX 0131, 0123, 0124,

0173

MARANTZ 0139, 0110, 0111

MARTA 0106

MEMOREX 0124, 0109

MGA 0138, 0140, 0147,

0148, 0141, 0142

MINOLTA 0100, 0145

MITSUBISHI 0138, 0140, 0147,

0148, 0141, 0142,

0161, 0164

MULTITECH 0147, 0127, 0104

NEC 0139, 0110, 0111,

0134

OLYMPIC 0124, 0123

OPTIMUS 0128, 0121, 0135,

0106

ORION 0126, 0120, 0132

PANASONIC 0123, 0124, 0121,

0122

PENNEY 0124, 0100, 0145,

0105, 0139, 0110,

0111

PENTAX 0100, 0111, 0145

VCRs/PVRs (cont.)

Brand Code

VCRs/PVRs

Brand Code

Cable boxes

Brand Code

PHILCO 0131, 0124, 0127,

0123, 0126, 0120,

0143

PHILIPS 0131, 0123, 0124,

0173

PIONEER 0123

PROSCAN 0145, 0100, 0123,

0124, 0131, 0146,

0101, 0102, 0133

QUASAR 0121, 0122, 0123,

0124

RADIO SHACK 0133, 0124, 0105,

0136, 0109, 0140,

0127

RCA 0133, 0145, 0100,

0123, 0124, 0131,

0146, 0101, 0102,

0170, 0172, 0174,

0176, 0183

REALISTIC 0124, 0105, 0136,

0109, 0140, 0127

Replay TV 7102

SAMSUNG 0137, 0102, 0104,

0133

SAMTRON 0163

SANSUI 0139, 0126, 0120,

0152

SANYO 0105, 0109, 0113

SCOTT 0101, 0102, 0104,

0109, 0138, 0140,

0147, 0148, 0126

SEARS 0105, 0106, 0107,

0108, 0100

SHARP 0135, 0136, 0167,

0162

SHINTOM 0117

SIGNATURE 2000 0127, 0135

SINGER 0117

SONY 0128, 0129, 0130,

0153, 0154, 0155,

7101

SV2000 0127

SYLVANIA 0131, 0123, 0124,

0127, 0178

SYMPHONIC 0127, 0168, 0177

TASHIRO 0106

TATUNG 0139, 0110, 0111

TEAC 0139, 0110, 0127,

0111

TECHNICS 0121, 0122, 0123,

0124

TEKNICA 0124, 0127, 0112

THOMSON 0179, 0183

Tivo 7100, 7101

TOSHIBA 0101, 0146, 0166,

0160

VECTOR RESEARCH 0111

WARDS 0135, 0136, 0109,

0144, 0106

YAMAHA 0105, 0139, 0110,

0111

ZENITH 0144, 0106, 0169,

0180

ABC 1124

ARCHER 1132, 1125

CABLEVIEW 1105, 1132

CITIZEN 1122, 1105

CURTIS 1112, 1113

DIAMOND 1124, 1132, 1125

EAGLE 1129

EASTERN 1134

GCBRAND 1132, 1105

GEMINI 1122, 1143

G.I./JERROLD 1119, 1124, 1125,

1126, 1127, 1120,

1121, 1122, 1111,

1123, 1152

HAMLIN 1140, 1141, 1142,

1145, 1118, 1112

HITACHI 1103, 1124

MACOM 1103, 1104, 1105,

1108

MAGNAVOX 1133

MEMOREX 1130

MOVIETIME 1132, 1105

OAK 1139, 1137, 1102

PANASONIC 1109, 1110, 1114,

1151, 1153

PHILIPS 1128, 1129, 1130,

1106, 1107, 1150,

1131

PIONEER 1101, 1116

PULSAR 1105, 1132

PUSER 1132

RCA 1115

REALISTIC 1132

REGAL 1112, 1118, 1140,

1141, 1142, 1145,

1149

REGENCY 1134

REMBRANT 1137, 1132, 1105,

1138

SAMSUNG 1105

S.A. 1111, 1112, 1113

SLMARK 1105, 1101

SPRUCER 1105, 1110

STARGATE 1132, 1105

TELECAPTION 1148

TELEVIEW 1101, 1105

TEXSCAN 1144

TOCOM 1135, 1136, 1147

TOSHIBA 1104, 1146

UNIKA 1132, 1125

UNIVERSAL 1122, 1132

VIDEOWAY 1106

VIEWSTAR 1129, 1130

ZENITH 1117, 1100

ZENITH/DRAKE 1100

SATELLITE

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:05 AM38

Black

Chapter 3: Using the remote control

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

CD players

Brand Code

Receivers

Brand Code

Receivers (cont.)

Brand Code

Laser disks

Brand Code

DVD players

Brand Code

Satellite receivers

Brand Code

Multi-brand remote control device codes (continued)

DISH NETWORK 2105, 2115, 2116,

(Echostar) 2117

ECHOSTAR 2105

EXPRESS VU 2105, 2115

G.E. 2106

G.I.(GENERAL 2108

INSTRUMENT)

GRADIENTE 2114

HITACHI 2103, 2111, 2112

HNS(Hughes) 2103

MAGNAVOX 2101, 2102

PANASONIC 2104

PHILIPS 2101, 2102, 2118

PRIMESTAR 2108

PROSCAN 2106, 2109, 2110,

2113

RCA 2106, 2109, 2110,

2113

SONY 2107

STAR CHOICE 2103, 2108

TOSHIBA 2100, 2103, 2119,

2120, 2121, 2122,

2123, 2124, 2125

UNIDEN 2101, 2102

AIWA 3123

APEX 3120

DENON 3100, 3117

FERGUSON 3101

HITACHI 3111

JVC 3109

KENWOOD 3115, 3129

KONKA 3119

MITSUBISHI 3105

NORDMENDE 3101

ONKYO 3121

ORITRON 3124

PANASONIC 3100

PHILIPS 3103, 3116

PIONEER 3102

RAITE 3113

RCA 3101, 3106

SABA 3101

SAMPO 3114

SAMSUNG 3110

SHARP 3108

SYLVANIA 3132, 3118

SMC 3125

SONY 3104, 3126, 3127,

3128

TECHNICS 3100

THOMSON 3101

TOSHIBA 3103

WAVE 3122

YAMAHA 3100, 3130

ZENITH 3107, 3112

VIALTA 3131

FUNAI 3132, 3118

DENON 5114

HITACHI 5100

KENWOOD 5102, 5103

MAGNAVOX 5101

MARANTZ 5114

MITSUBISHI 5114, 5118, 5119

NEC 5114

PANASONIC 5104, 5105, 5106,

5115

PHILIPS 5111

PIONEER 5114

PROSCAN 5114

QUASAR 5104, 5105, 5106,

5115

RCA 5114

SAMSUNG 5112

SANYO 5114, 5117

SHARP 5113, 5116

SONY 5107, 5108, 5109,

5110

TEAC 5114

TOSHIBA 5114

YAMAHA 5101

ADMIRAL 4120

AIWA 4125, 4126, 4146

DENON 4134, 4135, 4136,

4143

FISHER 4104

GARRARD 4113

HARMAN KARDON 4115, 4123, 4145

JENSEN 4129

JVC 4132, 4133, 4140,

4144

KENWOOD 4100, 4108, 4141,

4142, 4147

MAGNAVOX 4127, 4128

MARANTZ 4124

MCNTOSH 4116

MITSUBISHI 4148

NAKAMICHI 4106, 4117

ONKYO 4109, 4114

OPTIMUS 4103, 4127, 4131,

4130

PANASONIC 4119, 4118, 4121

PHILIPS 4123

PIONEER 4105, 4107, 4150

QUASAR 4119, 4118, 4121

RCA 4103, 4105, 4127,

4131, 4130, 4149

SANSUI 4103, 4111, 4139

SHARP 4134, 4137

SONY 4122

SOUNDE-SIGH 4138

TEAC 4112, 4113, 4111,

4110

TECHNICS 4121, 4118, 4119

VICTOR 4132, 4133

YAMAHA 4101, 4102

ADMIRAL 6126

AIWA 6133, 6135

CARVER 6129

DENON 6142, 6151

EMERSON 6139

FISHER 6105, 6106

GARRARD 6117

HARMAN/KARDON 6120, 6121, 6123,

6119

HITACHI 6107

JENSEN 6134

JVC 6140, 6141, 6145,

6148, 6151

KENWOOD 6100, 6101, 6111,

6145

LXI 6136

MAGNAVOX 6129, 6132

MARANTZ 6129

MACINTOSH 6121

NAKAMICHI 6110

ONKYO 6114, 6115

OPTIMUS 6108, 6118, 6120,

6122

PANASONIC 6124, 6125, 6127,

6150

PHILIPS 6129, 6130, 6149

PIONEER 6108

QUASAR 6125, 6127, 6124

RCA 6147, 6137, 6138,

6131, 6152

SANSUI 6110, 6146, 6113

SANYO 6105

SCOTT 6110, 6146

SHARP 6142, 6143

SHERWOOD 6120

SONY 6128

SOUNDE-SIGH 6144

TEAC 6112, 6116, 6118

TECHNICS 6127, 6124, 6125

VICTOR 6140, 6141, 6145

YAMAHA 6102, 6103, 6104

#01E_031-039_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:05 AM39

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

The illustrations below and on the next page provide a quick overview of your TV’s menu system.

Main menu layout

To open the main menus (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV side panel.

Menu layout and navigation

➞ Installation ➞ [ Installation sub menu is launched (see page 38 for details) ]

➞ Sleep Timer ➞ [ Sleep Timer Edit Window ]

➞ On/Off Timer ➞ [ On/Off Timer window ]

Setup ➞ PC Settings ➞ [ PC Settings Edit Window ]

➞ HDMI 1 Audio ➞ Auto / Digital / Analog

➞ HDMI 2 Audio ➞ Auto / Digital / Analog

➞ Slide Show Interval ➞ 2 sec. / 5 sec. / 10 sec. / 15 sec. / 20 sec.

➞ AVHD Skip Time ➞ 1 min. / 3 min. / 5 min. / 15 min.

➞ Long Life ➞ Picture Shift ➞ On / Off

➞ Gray Level ➞ 1 / 2 / 3

➞ Reverse

➞ White

➞ TV Guide On Screen™ ➞ Launch Gemstar / TV GUIDE

➞ Audio Player ➞ Launch MP3 audio player

Applications ➞ Picture Viewer ➞ Launch the picture viewer

➞ Digital CC / Audio Selector ➞ Launch the ATSC Digital CC Selector

➞ CableCARD™ ➞ Dynamic list of items provided by inserted CableCARD™

(this option is not available if CableCARD™ is not inserted).

➞ Picture Settings ➞ [ Picture Settings Edit Window ]

Video ➞ Advanced Picture Settings ➞ [ Advanced Picture Settings Edit Window ]

➞ Theater Settings ➞ [ Theater Settings Edit Window ]

➞ Audio Settings ➞ [ Audio Settings Window ]

Audio ➞ Advanced Audio Settings ➞ [ Advanced Audio Settings Window ]

➞ Audio Setup ➞ [ Audio Setup Window ]

➞ Favorite Channels ➞ [ Favorite Channels Edit Window ]

Preferences ➞ Closed Caption Mode ➞ Off / CC1 / CC2 / CC3 / CC4 / T1 / T2 / T3 / T4

➞ Closed Caption Advanced ➞ [ Advanced Closed Captions Window ]

➞ Input Labeling ➞ [ Input Labeling Edit Window ]

➞ Menu Language ➞ English / Français / Español

➞ Home CH Setup ➞ [ Home channel Setup Window ]

➞ Enable Rating Blocking ➞ Off / On

Locks ➞ Edit Rating Limits ➞ [ Edit Rating Limits Edit Window ]

➞ Channels Block ➞ [ Channels Block Edit Window ]

➞ Input Lock ➞ Off / Video / Video+

➞ Front Panel Lock ➞ Off / On

➞ GameTimer™ ➞ Off / 30 Min / 60 Min / 90 Min / 120 Min

➞ New PIN Code ➞ [ New PIN Code Entry Window ]

#01E_040-041_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:05 AM40

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

You can use the buttons on the remote

control or TV side panel to access and

navigate your TV’s on-screen menu system.

•Press MENU to open the menu

system.

•Use the up/down/left/right arrow

buttons (yzx •) on the remote

control or TV side panel to move in

the corresponding direction in a menu.

•Press ENTER to save your menu

settings or select a highlighted item. (A

highlighted menu item appears in a

different color in the menu.)

Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation

*The MENU button on the TV

side panel functions as the

ENTER button when a menu is

on-screen.

TV side panel

MENU (ENTER*)

EXIT

•

EXIT

x •

ENTER

Remote control

Navigating the menu system

•All menus close automatically if you do

not make a selection within 60 seconds,

except the signal meter menu which

closes automatically after 5 minutes.

•To close a menu instantly, press EXIT.

Setup / Installation menu layout

To open the Installation menu (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV side panel, open the Setup menu, select

Installation, and press ENTER.

From Main Menu/Setup

menu, select “Installation”

sub-menu

➔

TV Guide On Screen™ Setup ➞ Start ➞ [ Launches TV Guide On Screen™ system setup ]

Time and Date ➞ Start Setup ➞ [ Time And Date Setup Window ]

System Status ➞ System Information ➞ [ System Information Window ]

➞ Input Configuration ➞ [ Input Configuration Window ]

Terrestrial ➞ Channel Program ➞ ANT1

}

➞ [ Scan for new channels on desired Antenna ]

➞ ANT2

➞ Channel Add/Delete ➞ [ Channel Add / Delete Window ]

➞ Signal Meter ➞ [ Signal Meter Window ]

Devices ➞ IEEE1394 Devices ➞ [ IEEE1394 Device Management Window ]

➞ TheaterNet Devices ➞ [ TheaterNet Setup Window ]

➞ Basic Network setup

Network ➞ Recording E-mail setup

➞ Home File server setup

#01E_040-041_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:06 AM41

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Configuring the location of your TV

Screen 1: Select the TV location (USA or Canada), and then

press ENTER.

Screen 2: Enter the ZIP code (U.S.A.) or postal code (Canada)

for your location (use the Number buttons on the remote

control for numbers and the yz buttons for letters), and

then press ENTER. Screen 3 appears.

Screen 3: Do you have Cable service connected?

If you select Yes (and press ENTER), screen 4 appears.

If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 12 appears.

Screen 4: Do you have a Cable box connected?

If you select Yes (and press ENTER), screen 5 appears.

If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 13 appears.

The TV Guide On Screen

™

system in your TV is a no-fee

interactive program guide that uses the information you enter

during the following setup process to provide you with a

channel lineup and program listings for your area. The listings

are automatically updated several times a day.

Note:

•You must first set up your TV according to the applicable

connection instructions in Chapter 2.

•If you connected a Toshiba

AVHD Recorder, you

must perform the following TV Guide On Screen™ system setup

in order to use the Symbio’s full functionality. See pages 26 and

52 for further details about AVHD digital recorders.

To set up the TV Guide On Screen

™

system:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

3. A new set of Installation

menu icons appears

on-screen (see illustration

at right). Open the

TV Guide On Screen

™

Setup menu, highlight

Start, and press ENTER.

4. The following screen appears. Highlight “Set up TV Guide

On Screen

™

now” and press ENTER to continue.

5. The following screen appears. Press ENTER to continue.

TV Guide On Screen™ setup

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Start

TV Guide On Screen Setup

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system

#01E_042-045_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:07 AM42

Black

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Screen 5: Which TV input is your cable box plugged into?

If you select ANT 1, screen 6 appears.

If you select Video 1, screen 7 appears.

Screen 6: Select the channel your TV is tuned to when using

your cable box, and then press ENTER. Screen 7 appears.

Screen 7: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to

connect your Cable box to the G-LINK

™

terminal on the

TV. Make sure the G-LINK

™

cable is installed properly.

For additional details, see page 28.

Press ENTER to display screen 8.

Screen 8: Highlight your Cable box brand, and then press

ENTER to display screen 9.

Screen 9: To allow the TV Guide On Screen

™

system to find

the correct code for your brand of Cable box, tune your

Cable box to channel 02, leave the Cable box and TV ON,

and then press ENTER. Screen 10 appears.

Screen 10: The TV Guide On Screen

™

system will test the code

for the brand of Cable box you selected. Do not press any

keys on the TV, remote control, or Cable box until the

testing process is completed. When testing is completed,

screen 11 appears.

Screen 11: If your Cable box tuned itself to channel 09 after

testing, select Yes and press ENTER. If you selected ANT 1

in screen 5, screen 13 appears. If you selected Video 1 in

screen 5, screen 12 appears.

If your Cable box did not tune itself to channel 09 after

testing and you want to test the same code again, select

“Test this code again” and press ENTER.

If you want to test a different code, select No and press

ENTER. Screen 10 appears.

Note: Many cable boxes require testing more than one code.

(Continued on next page)

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)

#01E_042-045_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:07 AM43

Black

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Screen 12: Do you have an antenna connected?

Select either Yes or No, and then press ENTER. Screen 13

appears.

Note: If you selected NO in screen 3, you must select YES in

this screen to receive a channel lineup and program listings.

Screen 13: Are the settings correct?

If you select Yes, screen 14 appears.

If you select No, screen 1 appears.

Screen 14: Congratulations! You have completed basic

TV Guide On Screen

™

system setup.

Note: Read the on-screen information regarding the amount

of time it may take for listing information to download from

the TV Guide On Screen™ service.

Press ENTER to display screen 15.

Screen 15: Is a VCR connected?

If you select Yes, screen 16 appears.

If you select No, screen 21 appears.

Screen 16: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to

connect your VCR to the G-LINK

™

terminal on the TV.

Make sure the G-LINK

™

cable is installed properly. For

additional details, see page 28.

Press ENTER to display screen 17.

Screen 17: Select your VCR brand, and then press ENTER.

Screen 18 appears.

Screen 18: Turn on your VCR, insert a tape (either blank or

previously recorded), and then press PLAY. Screen 19

appears.

Screen 19: The TV Guide On Screen

™

system will test the code

for the brand of VCR you selected. Do not press any keys

on the TV, remote control, or VCR until the testing process

is completed. When testing is completed, screen 20 appears.

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)

#01E_042-045_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:08 AM44

Black

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen™ setup

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Screen 20: If your VCR stopped playing the tape after testing,

select Yes and press ENTER. Screen 21 appears.

If your VCR did not

stop playing the tape

after testing and you

want to test the same

code again, select

“Test this code again”

and press ENTER.

If you want to test a

different code, select No and press ENTER. Screen 19

appears.

Note: Many VCRs require testing more than one code.

Screen 21: Review the setup information displayed on your TV

screen (an example is shown below).

If the information on

your TV screen is

correct for your setup,

select “Yes, end setup”

and press ENTER.

Screen 22 appears.

If the information is

incorrect, select “No,

repeat setup process” and press ENTER. Screen 1 appears.

Screen 22: Congratulations! You have successfully completed

TV Guide On Screen

™

system setup.

Press ENTER to

display screen 23.

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)

Did your VCR stop playing?

Screen 23: This screen provides helpful information on using

your TV Guide On Screen

™

system.

Press ENTER to exit

the TV Guide On

Screen

™

setup and

watch TV.

TV Guide On Screen™ Reminder

The TV Guide On Screen

™

system receives program listing

data through your Cable or over-the-air video signal. In

order to receive regular program listing updates, remember

to do the following:

1. Leave the TV in standby mode when it is not in use

by turning it OFF but leaving the power cord

plugged in.

2. If you have a Cable box connected, leave it ON.

3. If you have a VCR connected, turn it OFF when not

in use. (Do not unplug the power cord.) See page 17

for VCR connection instructions.

4. If you have more than one Cable system in your area,

you may be prompted to select which Cable system’s

program data to download. If so prompted, follow the

on-screen instructions.

Note: If the TV power cord is unplugged for an

extended period of time, it may take up to 24 hours with

the TV in standby mode (power cord plugged in and

power OFF) to download the TV Guide On Screen™

program schedule. It may take up to a week before an

entire program schedule is available.

Turning off the TV Guide On Screen™

automatic display feature

After you set up the TV Guide On Screen

™

system, the

program guide will display automatically (by default) when

you turn on the TV. To turn off the automatic program guide:

1. Press TV GUIDE on the remote control to open the

TV Guide On Screen

™

system (if it is not already open).

2. Use the x • buttons to select the Setup menu.

3. Use the yz buttons to select “Change Default Options”,

and then press ENTER.

4. Use the yz buttons to select “General Defaults”, and

then press ENTER.

5. Set the “Auto Guide” option to Off.

6. Use the yz buttons to select Done, and then press

ENTER.

#01E_042-045_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:08 AM45

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Selecting the menu language

You can choose from three different languages (English, French

and Spanish) for the on-screen display of menus and messages.

(The TV Guide On Screen

™

menus are in English, regardless of

the language selected in this menu.)

To select the menu language:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Menu Language and press •.

3. Press y or z to select your preferred menu language and

press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Home CH Setup

English

Français

Español

Favorite Channels

Closed Caption Mode

Off

Closed Caption Advanced

Input Labeling

Menu Language English

Preferences

4. Press EXIT to close the Preferences menu.

Configuring the antenna input

sources

To configure the ANT 1 and ANT 2 input sources:

1. Press MENU and open

the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation

and press ENTER. (A

new set of Installation

menu icons will appear

on-screen, as shown in

step 3 below.)

3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Input Configuration,

and press ENTER.

Note: The Terrestrial menu may not be accessible (items will

be “grayed out”) in some instances (for example, if a cable

box is connected to the ANT 1 input or if one of the VIDEO

modes is the current input during TV Guide On Screen™

setup).

Terrestrial

Input Configuration

Channel Program

Channel Add/Delete

Signal Meter

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

4. Press x or • to select the input source (Cable or Antenna)

for the ANT 1 input on the TV.

Note: If a cable box is connected to the ANT 1 input during

TV Guide On Screen™ setup, the entire Terrestrial menu will

not be accessible, including the input source for ANT 1, which

will automatically display “Cable Box.”

5. Press z and then x or • to select the input source (Cable

or antenna) for the ANT 2 input on the TV, if applicable. If

you have not connected anything to ANT 2, skip this step.

Input Configuration

Antenna 1 In

Antenna 2 In

Cable

Antenna

Cancel Done

6. To save your new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to your original settings, highlight

Cancel and press ENTER.

Setting up your TV

For menu navigation instructions, see Chapter 4.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

#01E_046-048_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:09 AM46

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

When you press CHANNEL y or z on the remote control or

TV side panel, your TV will stop only on the channels stored in

the TV’s channel memory.

Follow the steps below to program channels into the TV’s

channel memory.

Programming channels automatically

Your TV can automatically detect all active channels in your area

and store them in its memory. After the channels are

programmed automatically, you can manually add or erase

individual channels.

Note:

•You must configure the antenna input sources before

programming channels (see page 46).

•If the input signal type is set to CABLE for an antenna input, the

automatic channel programming process erases channels that

were previously programmed into the TV’s memory.

•If the input signal type is set to ANTENNA, the automatic

channel programming process does NOT erase channels that

were previously programmed into the TV’s memory, but adds

newly found channels to the existing set of programmed

channels. To remove a channel from the memory, you must

manually delete it (see next page).

•To tune the TV to a channel not programmed in the channel

memory, you must use the Channel Number buttons on the

remote control.

•Programming channels for an antenna input configured for

CABLE will take substantially longer than for an antenna input

configured for ANTENNA. This is normal; however, once

channel programming is completed, you should not have to

repeat the programming process again unless your Cable TV

service lineup changes significantly.

•If you have a CableCARD™ inserted (page 15), channel

programming for ANT 1 is disabled because the CableCARD™

automatically loads the Cable channel list into the TV’s channel

memory.

To program channels automatically:

1. Make sure you have configured the antenna input sources.

See page 46 for details.

2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen).

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

4. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Program,

and press ENTER.

5. Highlight ANT 1 or

ANT 2, depending on

which antenna input

you want to program

channels for, and then

press ENTER to start

automatic channel

programming.

ANT 1 Antenna

Scanning channels, please wait ...

Abort

52%

The TV will automatically cycle through all the channels

for the antenna input you selected, and store all active

channels in the channel memory. While the TV is cycling

through the channels, the message “Scanning channels,

please wait” appears (as shown above).

6. To cancel channel programming, either press EXIT or

highlight Abort in the on-screen display and press ENTER.

When channel programming is done, press CHANNEL

yor z to view the programmed channels.

Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory

CHANNEL y

TV side panel

CHANNEL yz

Channel

Numbers

Terrestrial

Input Configuration

Channel Program

Channel Add/Delete

Signal Meter

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

(ENTER)

CHANNEL z

#01E_046-048_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:10 AM47

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Manually adding and deleting channels in

the channel memory

After automatically programming channels into the channel

memory, you can manually add or delete individual channels.

To add or delete channels in the channel memory:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 3).

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Add/Delete,

and then press ENTER.

Terrestrial

Input Configuration

Channel Program

Channel Add/Delete

Signal Meter

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

4. The illustration below left shows channels programmed for

the ANT 1 antenna input. To view the list of channels

programmed for the ANT 2 or Cable box antenna input,

press the y z buttons to highlight either “ANT 2” or

“Cable Box” and press ENTER.

Note: “Cable Box” will appear only if you connected a cable

box to your TV.

Channel Add/Delete

2Analog ANT 1

Cable Box

ANT 2

ANT 1

Reset

Cancel

Done

Digital

Analog

Digital

Analog

2 - 1

2 - 2

7 - 1

Channel Add/Delete

1Analog ANT 1

ANT 2

Cable Box

Analog

Cable Box

Reset

Cancel

Done

Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory (continued)

To add a channel to the channel memory:

Highlight the unchecked box next to the channel number

you want to add, and then press ENTER to check the box.

To manually add digital subchannels on a physical channel:

Use the Channel Numbers and the Dash (–/100) on the

remote control to enter the channel number (for example,

56–1).

If the channel is found, the number will be added to the list

and the box will be checked.

If the channel is not found, a message will appear.

To remove a channel from the channel memory:

Highlight the checked box next to the channel number you

want to remove, and then press ENTER to uncheck the

box.

To save your new settings:

Highlight Done and press ENTER.

To revert to your original settings:

Highlight Cancel and press ENTER before saving.

To remove all channels from the channel memory:

Highlight Reset and press ENTER, and then highlight

Done and press ENTER.

Note:

•This action applies to the current antenna input only. To

delete/add channels on the other input, highlight the input

you want (ANT1 or ANT 2) and press ENTER.

•This action cannot be canceled unless you highlight Cancel

and press ENTER before saving your changes.

Channel Add/Delete

2Analog ANT 1

ANT 2

ANT 1

Reset

Cancel

Done

Digital

Analog

Digital

Analog

Digital

Analog

2 - 1

2 - 2

7 - 1

Cable Box

#01E_046-048_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:11 AM48

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Programming your favorite channels

You can program up to 27 channels as favorite channels into

three Favorite Channel sets (nine channels from the ANT 1

input, nine from the ANT 2 input, and nine from the Cable

box input). You can then scan through your favorite channels

only, skipping other channels you do not normally watch.

To add and delete channels in the Favorite Channels sets:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Favorite Channels and press ENTER.

3. Use the yz buttons to select either ANT 1, ANT 2, or

Cable box and press ENTER.

4. Highlight Edit and press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Home CH Setup

Favorite Channels

Closed Caption Mode

Off

Closed Caption Advanced

Input Labeling

Menu Language English

Preferences

Favorite Channels ANT 1

Empty Empty Empty ANT 1

Empty Empty Empty

ANT 2

Cable Box

Edit

Done

To add a channel to the selected Favorite Channel set:

Use the yz buttons to highlight an unchecked box next to a

channel you want to set as a favorite, and then press ENTER to

check the box.

To delete the channel from the selected Favorite Channels set:

Highlight a checked box and press

ENTER to uncheck it.

Note: If you try to add more than

nine favorite channels per input, an

error message will appear. You will

need to delete (uncheck) a channel

before you can add another.

When done, highlight Done and press ENTER.

To program favorite channels for another input:

Either... Highlight ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box, which

will change the favorite channel settings in the selected

input. (This will not change the TV’s current input.)

Or... Press INPUT to select ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box

and then repeat steps 1–4.

“Cable Box” will appear only if you connected a cable box

to your TV.

Favorite Channels ANT 2

CH 6 Empty Empty ANT 1

Empty Empty Empty

ANT 2

Cable Box

Edit

Done

To clear your favorite channel lists:

1. Press MENU and open the

Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Favorite Channels

and press ENTER.

3. Highlight Edit and press

ENTER.

4. Highlight Reset and press

ENTER.

5. Highlight Done and press ENTER.

To tune your favorite channels for the current ANT input:

Press FAV CH yz.

To tune your favorite channels using the favorite channel

list:

1. Press 100 to display the favorite channel list.

2. Press the corresponding number button

(1-9) to select your desired channel.

Note: To tune your favorite channels for another

input, you will need to change the Input Selection

first.

To quickly scan through your favorite channels in a nine

picture multi-window (for the current ANT input):

Press FAV SCAN. See page 83 for details.

Note:

•To tune to a channel from the FAV SCAN mode, highlight a

window and press ENTER.

•To scan your favorite channels for another input, you will need to

change the Input Selection first.

Edit Favorite Channels

ANT 1

Reset

Done

Cancel

Only 9 favorite channels are allowed,

please deselect other channels first.

FAV SCAN

FAV CH yz

Channel Numbers

100

CH 4-1

CH 4-2

CH 9

CH 10

CH 12

CH 17

CH 19

---

Edit Favorite Channels

ANT 2

Reset

Done

Cancel

2 - 1

2 - 2

4 - 1

17 - 1

17 - 2

28 - 1

28 - 2

28 - 3

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:12 AM49

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

The TheaterNet feature allows you to control many brands of

IEEE1394 and/or infrared remote-controlled A/V devices

through your TV using on-screen control icons and the TV’s

remote control.

Note:

•Although the TheaterNet on-screen device control feature includes

codes for many devices, it may not include codes for some or all of

the features on certain devices you wish to control. If you are

unable to program the TheaterNet feature to operate your device

or some of the features on that device, use the device’s remote

control or the controls on the device.

• For IR pass-through device control information, see “Controlling

infrared remote-controlled devices through the TV (IR pass-

through)” on page 24.

Setting up TheaterNet

All device types except IEEE1394 require the following setup

process before you can control them using the TheaterNet on-

screen icons.

All compatible IEEE1394 devices are automatically recognized

by the TheaterNet feature and do not require setup.

Note: See page 25 for details about the IEEE1394 ports. If your

IEEE1394 device is not recognized through the IEEE1394 port or

through the TheaterNet feature, it may be possible to set it up for IR

pass-through control as an infrared device (see page 24).

To set up TheaterNet device control:

1. Make sure you have properly connected your infrared

remote-controlled device(s). See page 24 for details.

2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 4).

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

4. Open the Devices menu, highlight TheaterNet Devices,

and then press ENTER.

IEEE1394 Devices

TheaterNet Devices

Devices

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control

5. The TheaterNet Setup menu opens.

TheaterNet Setup

Input

Type

Brand

IR List

IR Code

Video 1

Cable

General Instrum...

0000

Test

Reset Done

Select device

type, brand,

and IR code

from owners

manual.

0000

Using the x • buttons, select the Input the device is

connected to.

Note: When the input is changed, all unsaved settings will be

lost.

6. Press z and then x • to select the device Type.

7. Press z and then x • to select the device Brand.

Note: When selecting a new brand, the IR code will be set to 0.

8. Press z and then x • to select the device’s IR code.

9. If the desired IR code is found, skip to step 10.

If the desired IR code is not in the list, press z and use the

Channel Number buttons to enter the device IR code.

Note: You can find the IR code for your device in the on-

screen list or in the TheaterNet device code table on pages

52–54.

10. Highlight Test and press ENTER to test whether the device

responds to the code. If the device does not respond to the

code, repeat steps 8 and 9 using another code for the same

device.

When done, highlight Done and press ENTER or choose a

different Input value for which to setup TheaterNet device

control.

To remove a device from TheaterNet:

1. Follow steps 1–5 above.

2. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:13 AM50

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Using the TheaterNet control icons

1. Set up your infrared devices in TheaterNet, if you have not

already done so (see page 50).

Note: IEEE1394 devices do not need to be set up in

TheaterNet because they appear automatically in the

TheaterNet menu.

2. Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the device

control selection screen.

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Setting up and using TheaterNet™ on-screen device control (continued)

DEVICE

3. Using the yzx • buttons, highlight the device you want

to control and press ENTER.

TheaterNet

Video 2 Video 3

ColorStream HD2

ColorStream HD1

Toshiba

Toshiba Toshiba

Toshiba

2 3

4. The input automatically changes to the input for the

selected device, and the device’s control icons display

on-screen.

TOP MENU

SELECT

ENTER

EXIT

Toshiba

ColorStream HD1

Highlight the icon for the function you want to control and

press ENTER.

To select the device’s control icons directly:

Press CTRL.

To close the on-screen control icons:

Press EXIT.

To view another source:

Press DEVICE and select the input source you want to

view.

CTRL

The following are examples of the TheaterNet on-screen

control icons for various devices.

ENTER

EXIT

TheaterNet

Video 2 Video 3

ColorStream HD2

ColorStream HD1

Toshiba

Toshiba Toshiba

Toshiba

2 3

Toshiba

* If you connected a Toshiba

AVHD Recorder, you

must set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system in order to use

the Symbio’s full functionality. See Chapter 5 for details on

setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system. See pages 26

and 55 for further details about AVHD digital recorders.

x •

Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder control*

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:14 AM51

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Aiwa 0406

Bose 0674

Carver 0269

Curtis Mathes 0300

Denon 0160

GE 0078

Harman/Kardon 0892

JVC 0331

Left Coast 0892

Linn 0269

Luxman 0165

Magnavox 0269

Marantz 0892, 0321, 0269

NEC 0264

Nakamichi 0321

Optimus 0395, 0300

Panasonic 0308, 0521

Parasound 0246

Philips 0892, 0269

Pioneer 0013, 0300

Polk Audio 0892, 0269

RCA 0300

Realistic 0395

Sansui 0321

Shure 0264

Sony 0689, 0220

Soundesign 0078, 0211

Technics 0308, 0521

Victor 0331

Wards 0078, 0013, 0211

Yamaha 0354, 0133

Cable boxes

Brand Code

ABC 0003, 0008, 0014,

0007, 0011, 0017

Americast 0899

Bell & Howell 0014

Bell South 0899

Contec 0019

Director 0476

Everquest 0015

Gemini 0015

General Instrument 0476, 0003, 0276,

0011, 0810

GoldStar 0144

Hamlin 0009, 0020, 0273

Hitachi 0011

Hytex 0007

Jasco 0015

Jerrold 0476, 0003, 0276,

0012, 0014, 0015,

0011, 0810

Memorex 0000

Motorola 0476, 1106, 0276,

0810

Oak 0019, 0007

Pace 0237

Panasonic 0000, 0107

Paragon 0000

Philips 0305, 0317

Pioneer 0877, 0144, 0533,

1877

Pulsar 0000

Quasar 0000

RadioShack 0015

Regal 0020, 0273, 0279

Rembrandt 0011

Runco 0000

Samsung 0144

Scientific Atlanta 0877, 0008, 0017,

0477, 1877

Signal 0015

Signature 0011

sony 1006

Starcom 0003, 0015

Stargate 0015

Starquest 0015

Supercable 0276

Tocom 0012

Torx 0003

Toshiba 0000

Tusa 0015

United Artists 0007

Zenith 0000, 0525, 0899

CD players

Brand Code

Aiwa 0157, 0124

Burmester 0420

California Audio Labs 0029, 0303

Carver 0157, 0179, 0437

Classic 1297

DKK 0000

DMX Electronics 0157

Denon 0873, 0003

Emerson 0305

Fisher 0174, 0179, 1325

GPX 1296

Garrard 0393, 0420

Genexxa 0032, 0305

Harman/Kardon 0157, 0173

Hitachi 0032

JVC 0072, 1294

KLH 1318, 1372, 1373

Kenwood 0681, 0826, 0626,

0028, 0037, 0190

Koss 1317

Krell 0157

LXI 0305

Linn 0157

MCS 0029

MTC 0420

Magnavox 0157, 0305

Marantz 0626, 0029, 0157,

0180

Miro 0000

Mission 0157

NSM 0157

Nikko 0174

Onkyo 0868, 0101

Optimus 1063, 0000, 0032,

0037, 0145, 0179,

0305, 0420, 0437,

0468

Panasonic 0029, 0303

Parasound 0420

Philips 0626, 0157

Pioneer 1063, 1062, 0032,

0305, 0468

Polk Audio 0157

Proton 0157

QED 0157

Quasar 0029

RCA 1062, 0032, 0053,

0179, 0305, 0468,

0764

Realistic 0179, 0180, 0420

Rotel 0157, 0420

SAE 0157

Sansui 0157, 0305

Sanyo 0179

Scott 0305

Sears 0305

Sharp 0861, 0037, 0180

Sherwood 1067, 0180

Sonic Frontiers 0157

Sony 0490, 0000, 0100,

0185, 0604, 1364

Soundesign 0145

TDK 1208

Tascam 0420

Teac 0174, 0180, 0393,

0420

Technics 0029, 0303

Victor 0072

Wards 0157, 0053

Yamaha 0888, 0036, 0187,

1292

Yorx 0461

Laser disk players

Brand Code

Aiwa 0203

Carver 0064, 0194, 0323

Denon 0059, 0172

Disco Vision 0023

Funai 0203

Harman/Kardon 0194

Hitachi 0023

Magnavox 0194, 0217

Marantz 0064, 0194

Mitsubishi 0059

NAD 0059

Optimus 0059

Panasonic 0204

Philips 0064, 0194

Pioneer 0059, 0023

Polk Audio 0194

Quasar 0204

Realistic 0203

Samsung 0323

Sega 0023

Sony 0193, 0201

Technics 0204

Theta Digital 0194

Yamaha 0217

Miscellaneous audio devices

Brand Code

Aiwa 0010, 0159, 0404

Fisher 0052

JVC 0073

Jerrold 0520, 0459

Scientific Atlanta 0460

Sony 0010, 0159, 0576

Starcom 0459

Cable boxes (cont.)

Brand Code

CD players (cont.)

Brand Code

TheaterNet

™

IR device codes

Amplifiers

Brand Code

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:14 AM52

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Video accessory (HDTV decoder)

Brand Code

Panasonic 1120

Pioneer 1010

Princeton 0113, 0295

Samsung 1190

Sensory Science 1126

Sharp 1010

Receivers

Brand Code

ADC 0531

Aiwa 1089, 1405, 0121,

0158, 0189, 0405,

1388, 1641

Alco 1390

Anam 1609

Apex Digital 1257

Arcam 1120

Audiotronic 1189

Audiovox 1390

Bose 1229

Cambridge Soundworks

1370

Capetronic 0531

Carver 1089, 1189, 0042,

0189

Casio 0195

Clarinette 0195

Compaq 1136

Curtis Mathes 0080

Daewoo 1250

Denon 1104, 1160, 0004,

1360

Fisher 0042, 1801

Garrard 0463

Harman/Kardon 0110, 0189, 0891

Hewlett Packard 1181

JBL 0110, 1306

JVC 0074, 1374

KLH 1390

Kenwood 1313, 1027, 1570,

1569, 0027, 0042,

0186

Koss 1366

LXI 0181

Lasonic 1798

Linn 0189

Lloyd’s 0195

MCS 0039

Magnavox 1089, 1189, 0189,

0195, 0391, 0531

Marantz 1089, 1189, 0039,

0189

Modulaire 0195

Musicmagic 1089

Nakamichi 0097

Onkyo 0135, 0842, 1298

Optimus 1023, 0042, 0080,

0181, 0186, 0531,

0670, 0738, 0801

Panasonic 1518, 0039, 0309,

0367

Penney 0195

Philips 1089, 1189, 1269,

0189, 0391, 1120

Receivers (cont.)

Brand Code

Satellite receivers (cont.)

Brand Code

Toshiba 0749, 0790, 1052,

1053, 1054, 1285,

1286, 1287, 1289,

1749

Uniden 0724, 0722

Zenith 0856, 1856

VCRs

Brand Code

Admiral 0048, 0209

Adventura 0000

Aiko 0278

Aiwa 0037, 0000

Akai 0041

America Action 0278

American High 0035

Asha 0240

Audiovox 0037, 0278

Beaumark 0240

Bell & Howell 0104

Broksonic 0184, 0121, 0209,

0002, 0479, 1479

CCE 0072, 0278

Calix 0037

Canon 0035

Carver 0081

Cineral 0278

Citizen 0037, 0278, 1278

Colt 0072

Craig 0037, 0047, 0240,

0072

Curtis Mathes 0060, 0035, 0162,

0041, 0760, 1035

Cybernex 0240

Daewoo 0045, 0278, 1278

Denon 0042

Dynatech 0000

Electrohome 0037

Electrophonic 0037

Emerex 0032

Emerson 0037, 0184, 0000,

0121, 0043, 0209,

0002, 0278, 0479,

1278, 1479

Fisher 0047, 0104

Fuji 0035, 0033

Funai 0000

GE 0060, 0035, 0240,

0760, 0807, 1035,

1060

Garrard 0000

Go Video 0432

GoldStar 0037, 0038, 1237

Gradiente 0000

HI-Q 0047

Harley Davidson 0000

Harman/Kardon 0081, 0038

Harwood 0072

Headquarter 0046

Hitachi 0000, 0042, 0041

Hughes Network Systems

0042

JVC 0067, 0041

Jensen 0041

KEC 0037, 0278

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Pioneer 1023, 0014, 0080,

0150, 0244, 0531,

0630, 1384

Polk Audio 0189

Proscan 1254

Quasar 0039

RCA 1023, 1254, 0080,

0531, 1390, 1609

Realistic 0181, 0195

Samsung 1295

Sansui 1089, 0189

Sanyo 0801, 1251

Sharp 0186, 1286

Sherwood 0491, 0502, 1653

Sony 1058, 1258, 1158,

0158, 0474, 1367,

1558, 1658,1758

Soundesign 0670

Stereophonics 1023

Sunfire 1313

Teac 0463

Technics 1308, 1309, 1518,

0039, 0309

Thorens 1189

Venturer 1390

Victor 0074

Wards 0014, 0080, 0158,

0189

Yamaha 0176, 0186, 1176

Yorx 0195

Zenith 0857

Satellite receivers

Brand Code

AlphaStar 0772

Chaparral 0216

Crossdigital 1109

DishPro 1005, 0775

Echostar 1005, 0775

Expressvu 0775

GE 0566

GOI 0775

General Instrument 0869

HTS 0775

Hitachi 0819

Hughes Network Systems

1142, 0749, 1749

JVC 0775

Magnavox 0724, 0722

Memorex 0724

Mitsubishi 0749

Motorola 0869

Next Level 0869

Panasonic 0247, 0701

Paysat 0724

Philips 1142, 0749, 0724,

1076, 0722, 1749

Proscan 0392

RCA 0392, 0566, 0855,

0143

RadioShack 0869

SKY 0856

Samsung 1109

Sony 0639

Star Choice 0869

TheaterNet

™

IR device codes (continued)

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:14 AM53

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

KLH 0072

Keen 0693

Kenwood 0067, 0041, 0038

Kodak 0035, 0037

LXI 0037

Lloyd’s 0000

Logik 0072

MEI 0035

MGA 0240, 0043

MGN Technology 0240

MTC 0240, 0000

Magnasonic 1278

Magnavox 0035, 0039, 0081,

0000, 0149, 0563,

1781

Magnin 0240

Marantz 0035, 0081

Marta 0037

Matsushita 0035, 0162, 0454

Memorex 0035, 0162, 0037,

0048, 0039, 0047,

0240, 0000, 0104,

0209, 0046, 0454,

0479, 1037, 1162,

1237, 1262

Minolta 0042

Mitsubishi 0067, 0043, 0807

Motorola 0035, 0048

Multitech 0000, 0072

NEC 0104, 0067, 0041,

0038

Nikko 0037

Noblex 0240

Olympus 0035

Optimus 1062, 0162, 0037,

0048, 0104, 0432,

0454, 1048, 1162,

1262

Orion 0184, 0209, 0002,

0479, 1479

Panasonic 1062, 0035, 0162,

0225, 0454, 0616,

1035, 1162, 1262

Penney 0035, 0037, 0240,

0042, 0038, 1035,

1237

Pentax 0042

Philco 0035, 0209, 0479

Philips 0035, 0081, 0618,

1081, 1181

Pilot 0037

Pioneer 0067

Polk Audio 0081

Profitronic 0240

Proscan 0060, 0760, 1060

Protec 0072

Pulsar 0039

Quarter 0046

Quartz 0046

Quasar 0035, 0162, 0454,

1035, 1162

RCA 0060, 0240, 0042,

0149, 0760, 0807,

1035, 1060

RadioShack 0000, 1037

Radix 0037

Randex 0037

Realistic 0035, 0037, 0048,

0047, 0000, 0104,

0046

ReplayTV 0614, 0616

Runco 0039

STS 0042

Samsung 0240, 0045

Sanky 0048, 0039

Sansui 0000, 0067, 0209,

0041, 0479, 1479

Sanyo 0047, 0240, 0104,

0046

Scott 0184, 0045, 0121,

0043

Sears 0035, 0037, 0047,

0000, 0042, 0104,

0046, 1237

Semp 0045

Sharp 0048, 0807, 0848

Shintom 0072

Shogun 0240

Singer 0072

Sonic Blue 0614, 0616

Sony 0035, 0032, 0000,

0033, 0636, 1032,

1232

Sylvania 0035, 0081, 0000,

0043, 1781

Symphonic 0000

TMK 0240

Tatung 0041

Teac 0000, 0041

Technics 0035, 0162

Teknika 0035, 0037, 0000

Thomas 0000

Tivo 0618, 0636

Toshiba 0045, 0043, 0845

Totevision 0037, 0240

Unitech 0240

Vector 0045

Vector Research 0038

Video Concepts 0045

Videomagic 0037

Videosonic 0240

Villain 0000

Wards 0060, 0035, 0048,

0047, 0081, 0240,

0000, 0042, 0072,

0149, 0760

White Westinghouse 0209, 0072, 1278

XR-1000 0035, 0000, 0072

Yamaha 0038

Zenith 0039, 0000, 0209,

0033, 0479, 1479

DVD players

Brand Code

Aiwa 0641

Apex Digital 0672, 0717, 0755,

0794, 0796, 0797,

0830, 0856, 1100

Audiologic 0736

B & K 0655, 0662

Blue Parade 0571

Broksonic 0695

DVD2000 0521

Daewoo 0784

Denon 0490, 0634

Emerson 0591

Enterprise 0591

Fisher 0670

GE 0522, 0717

GPX 0699, 0769

Go Video 0715

Gradiente 0651

Greenhill 0717

Harman/Kardon 0582, 0702

Hitachi 0573, 0664

Hiteker 0672

JBL 0702

JVC 0558, 0623, 0867

KLH 0717

Kenwood 0490, 0534, 0682,

0737

Konka 0711, 0719, 0720,

0721

Koss 0651

Lasonic 0798

Magnavox 0503, 0675

Malata 0782

Marantz 0539

Microsoft 0522

Mintek 0717

Mitsubishi 0521

Nesa 0717

Next Base 0826

Norcent 0872

Onkyo 0503, 0627

Oritron 0651

Panasonic 0490, 0632, 1362,

1462, 1490

Philips 0503, 0539, 0646,

0854

Pioneer 0525, 0571, 0632

Polk Audio 0539

Princeton 0674

Proscan 0522

RCA 0522, 0571, 0717,

0822

Rotel 0623

Rowa 0823

Sampo 0698

Samsung 0573, 0820

Sansui 0695

Sanyo 0670

Sharp 0630

Sherwood 0633

Shinsonic 0533

Sony 0533, 0864, 1533

Sylvania 0675, 0821

Technics 0490

Techwood 0692

Theta Digital 0571

Toshiba 0503, 0695, 1045

Tredex 0800

Urban Concepts 0503

XBox 0522

VCRs (cont.)

Brand Code

VCRs (cont.)

Brand Code

DVD players (cont.)

Brand Code

TheaterNet

™

IR device codes (continued)

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:14 AM54

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Setting the AVHD device skip time

When you connect an external AVHD (audio/video hard drive)

device—such as the Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD Recorder—to

one of the TV’s IEEE1394 ports, you can use the AVHD device

skip time feature to set the number of minutes the device will

skip forward or backward when you press the SKIP buttons.

Note:

•This TV will work best with the Toshiba

AVHD

Recorder for recording high definition and standard definition

material from either tuner and for controlling live TV (pause/rewind/

etc.). When the Symbio™ AVHD Recorder is connected to the TV,

the remote control keys (Live, STOP, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, etc.) are

automatically activated to allow pausing of live TV.

•When you connect an AVHD (or D-VHS) device, the TV Guide

On Screen™ system is automatically configured to allow recording.

See page 26 for device connection information. See Chapters 5 and

7 for details about setting up and using the TV Guide On screen™

system.

To set the AVHD device skip time:

1. Press MENU and open

the Setup menu.

2. Highlight AVHD Skip

Time and press •.

3. Press y or z to select

the AVHD skip time (1,

3, 5, or 15 minutes) and

press ENTER.

Setting the HDMI™ audio mode

To select the HDMI audio mode:

1. Press MENU and open

the Setup menu.

2. Highlight HDMI 1 (or

2) Audio and press •.

3. Press z or y to select

the HDMI audio mode

(Auto, Digital, or

Analog) and press

ENTER. (Auto is the

recommended mode). See “Connecting an HDMI or a

DVI device to the HDMI input” on page 22.

Setting the time and date

Note: If you already set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the

time and date were set automatically and you can skip this step.

To set the time and date:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 3 below.)

3. Open the Time And Date menu, highlight Start Setup, and

press ENTER.

Start Setup

Time And Date

If you have not set up the TV Guide On Screen

™

system,

or if you have not set up the time, the following screen will

appear. To set the time, highlight TV Guide On Screen

™

and press ENTER. The TV Guide On Screen

™

setup

sequence will start, and the time and date will be set

automatically.

Cancel

Time And Date

Manual TV Guide On Screen

Your TV Guide On Screen system can provide accurate

time and date information.

It is recommended you set up TV Guide On Screen

first and use it to obtain the time and date.

If you have already set up the TV Guide On Screen

™

system, the time and date setting screen will appear and you

will need to manually set the time and date.

Cancel

Date (MM/DD/YY)

Time (HH:MM)

Done

Time And Date

:11 11

/06 30/05

Note:

• If you highlight TV Guide On Screen™ (above) to set the time and

date through the TV Guide On Screen™ system and a power

outage occurs, the time and date will be updated automatically

when the power is restored.

•If you highlight Manual (above) to set the time and date manually

and a power outage occurs, you will lose the time and date settings

when the power is restored.

•If you manually set the time and date and then perform TV Guide

On Screen™ setup, the manual time and date settings will be

overridden by the TV Guide On Screen™ settings.

15 min

5 min

3 min

1 min

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Auto

2 Sec

15 min

Slide Show Interval

AVHD Skip Time

Setup

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

PC Settings

Analog

Digital

Auto

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

Auto

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:15 AM55

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Viewing the CableCARD™ menu

A CableCARD

™

enables you to view encrypted digital channels.

See page 15 for connection and subscription information.

After the CableCARD

™

is inserted, a CableCARD

™

option

appears in the Applications menu, with informational screens

provided by your digital CableCARD

™

service (see illustrations

below).

CableCard Connected -- Acquiring

channel information.

CableCard services will only operate

with cable signal connected to Antenna 1.

To view the CableCARD

™

menu:

1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.

2. Highlight CableCARD

™

and press •.

3. Press z or y to select one of the side menu items and press

ENTER to display the information.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Applications

TV Guide On Screen

Audio Player

Picture Viewer

Digital CC/Audio Selector

IP Service

Conditional Access

CableCARD(tm) Status

Network Setup

CableCARD(tm) Pairing

CableCARD

Note: The CableCARD™ menu is for informational purposes

only and has no user-adjustable options.

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

Viewing the digital signal meter

You can view the digital signal meter for ANT 1 and ANT 2

digital TV input sources only.

To view the digital signal meter:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 3 below.)

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

PC Settings

Auto

2 Sec

15 min

HDMI Audio

Slide Show Interval

AVHD Skip Time

Setup

3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Signal Meter, and

press ENTER.

Terrestrial

Input Configuration

Channel program

Channel Add/Delete

Signal Meter

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

4. Use the yzx • buttons to select the antenna input and

digital channel whose signal you want to check.

Note: The physical digital channel number listed in the Signal

Meter screen may not correspond to a virtual TV channel

number. Contact your local broadcasters to obtain the RF

channel numbers for your local digital stations.

Signal Meter

Antenna 1

Physical Digital Channel 13

Virtual Digital Channel

Done

N/A

Signal Locked

Peak

To close the screen and return to the Terrestrial menu:

Highlight Done and press ENTER.

To return to normal viewing:

Press EXIT.

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:16 AM56

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV

To check the system status:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown

below right).

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

System Infomation

System Status

3. Open the System Status menu, highlight System

Information, and then press ENTER.

4. Use the x • buttons to scroll through the menu bar to

check the Product Information and Software Version.

System Information

Done

Brand:

Model:

IEEE1394 GUID:

Toshiba

42HPX95

00003914-28343803

Product Information

System Information

Done

0.8.2

Jun 13 2005 - 13:54:14

FW:1.41

Sub:41

Software Version

To close the screen and return to the Installation menu:

Highlight Done and press ENTER.

To return to normal viewing:

Press EXIT.

Restore Factory Defaults

To restore all settings and channels to their factory default

values:

1. Follow steps 1–3 above.

2. Use the x • buttons to scroll through the menu bar to

select Factory Defaults.

3. Enter your PIN code (or 0000 if no PIN code has been set).

4. Highlight Yes and press ENTER. The TV will turn off

automatically after a few seconds. After the TV turns off,

unplug the TV power cord and then plug it in again to

complete the restore process.

System Information

Press YES to confirm. After the TV

turns off, unplug it and plug it dack

in to complete the reset.

Yes No

To cancel the reset:

Highlight No and press ENTER.

Viewing the system status

#01E_049-057_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:17 AM57

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

The TV Guide On Screen

™

system is a free, interactive,

on-screen program guide built in to your Toshiba TV that lists

schedules and information for TV programs in your area.

Note: Over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide

On Screen™ data is required for the TV Guide On Screen™ system to

operate. The TV Guide On Screen™ system does not work with satellite

programming. Toshiba does not provide the TV Guide On Screen™ data;

rather, such data is provided by a third party, which is responsible for its

accuracy and availability. Additionally, occasional compatibility issues may

exist between the TV Guide On Screen™ system contained in your TV and

the data provided by the third party. If you experience any performance

issues with your TV Guide On Screen™ system, please contact the

following:

•In the U.S., call TACP Consumer Solutions at (800) 631-3811 or

visit http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.

•In Canada, call TCL Customer Service at 1-800-268-3404.

The TV Guide On Screen

™

system includes the following

features:

•Streamlined on-screen assisted setup—Quickly and easily set

up your TV Guide On Screen

™

system using the on-screen

prompts (see “Setting up the TV Guide On Screen

™

system”

below).

•Program listings and INFO windows—Scroll through eight

days of TV listings and view program information such as

rating, stereo, HDTV, new episode.

•Watch TV and display TV Guide On Screen

™

information

simultaneously.

•Channel lineup customization—Customize your channel

lineup so your favorite stations are listed first.

•Direct tuning—Directly tune the TV to a current program

you want to watch by selecting it in the program guide.

•Reminders—

Schedule show reminders that will either display

an on-screen notification banner or automatically tune the TV

to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder.

•Recording—Easily schedule recording of one or more

programs.

Note: A VCR or IEEE1394 recording device is required for recording.

It is recommended that you connect your devices according to the

instructions in Chapter 2.

•Search—Search for shows by category, keyword, or

alphabetically.

•On-screen help—The TV Guide On Screen

™

system contains

on-screen feature definitions and navigation instructions.

Setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system

Follow these instructions to set up the TV Guide On Screen

™

system so it can receive current program data for your area.

Note: If you move the TV to a different ZIP/postal code, you will

need to perform the TV Guide On Screen™ Setup process to

reconfigure your TV Guide On Screen™ system.

If you have not already connected your antenna, cable box,

and/or recording device, see Chapter 2 for connection

instructions.

Note: You must connect a VCR or an IEEE1394 compatible

recording device to use the TV Guide On Screen™ system’s

one-touch recording feature. It is recommended that you

connect your devices according to the connection instructions

in Chapter 2.

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and then press ENTER to open the

Installation menus. (A new set of menu icons will appear

on-screen, as shown in step 3 below.)

3. Open the TV Guide On Screen

™

Setup menu, highlight

Start, and then press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Start

TV Guide On Screen Setup

4. Go to Chapter 5 for instructions on completing the setup.

Read this chapter for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen

™

interactive program guide.

To open the TV Guide On Screen

™

system:

•While watching TV, press

TV GUIDE on the

remote control;

—or—

•Press MENU, open the

Applications menu,

highlight TV Guide

On Screen

™

, and press

ENTER.

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of

television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is

prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and

other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.

Using the TV Guide On Screen™

interactive program guide

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Applications

TV Guide On Screen

Audio Player

Picture Viewer

Digital CC/Audio Selector

CableCARD

Note: After setting up the TV Guide On Screen™ system, the program

guide opens automatically by default when you turn on the TV. To turn

off this feature, see page 45.

#01E_058-061_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:18 AM58

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV Guide On Screen™ remote control functions

BUTTON FUNCTION

TV GUIDE •When watching TV, enters the TV Guide On Screen™ system and highlights the current show

listing.

•When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, returns to watching TV and displays the show in

the Video Window.

Numbers •For direct channel tuning, priority ordering, and channel editing.

– (digital separator) •For entering digital channel numbers.

MENU •Displays the panel menu, in which you can choose options (for example, record, remind,

keyword).

INFO •Cycles between levels of information, as available, in a Service screen or other type of screen.

ENTER •Makes a selection or executes an action.

•With a currently airing show listing highlighted, returns to watching TV and tunes to the show

channel.

•With a future airing show listing highlighted, displays a panel menu with viewing options.

yzx ••Provide directional control.

•When watching TV, y and z provide surfing through channels turned ON in the LISTINGS

screen.

PAGE UP/DOWN •When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, moves from one set of screen information to the

next, when applicable.

REC •When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system or watching TV, initiates the recording process.

SPLIT •When in the TV Guide On Screen™ system, toggles between locking and unlocking the Video

Window.

| and |TT •Jump forward and backward one day in the LISTINGS screen.

TV GUIDE

INFO

x •

– (digital

separator)

REC

PAGE U P/

DOWN

Numbers

}

SPLIT

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system

ENTER

|TT and SS

•While watching TV,

press TV GUIDE to

enter the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system.

The LISTINGS screen

will appear with the current

show highlighted.

•When in the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system, if you

press TV GUIDE from any

screen, the TV will tune to the

show displayed in the Video

Window.

•Use the arrow keys on the

remote control (yzx •) to

highlight any show, and then

press ENTER to tune to that

show.

•Scroll left or right (x

•) to view eight days of listings.

•Press MENU to display a panel menu with options for the currently

highlighted program or tile, including setting recordings and reminders.

•To access another Service screen:

1. Press y to highlight the Service Bar.

2. Press x or • to highlight a different Service (LISTINGS, SEARCH,

SETUP, SCHEDULE, or RECORDINGS).

3. Press z to use that Service.

Note: Helpful information about each Service appears in the Info Box.

Note:

•The TV Guide On Screen™ menus shown in this manual are

for illustration purposes only. The channels, programs, and

TV Guide On Screen™ information as illustrated may not be

available in your area. The options and features as illustrated

are subject to change when updates are downloaded from the

TV Guide On Screen™ service to your TV.

•The TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide supports

cable-ready, cable box, and digital cable services, as well as

over-the-air broadcasts. It does not provide listings for satellite

services.

#01E_058-061_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:18 AM59

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Panel Menus

•A panel menu appears:

–when you press MENU on a highlighted tile (if additional options

are available); or

–when you press ENTER on a show starting in the future.

•When a panel menu appears, the highlighted tile changes color to

indicate that the panel menu relates to the tile.

•Press INFO to display help for the current panel menu.

•Press y and z to move among the options.

•Press x and • to move to adjacent options or, if the highlight is on a

odometer, to change the odometer choice.

•To move the highlight to the default command button, press ENTER

from an odometer or entry box.

•To execute the action and close the panel menu, highlight the

command button and press ENTER.

•To cancel any changes and close the panel menu:

–press MENU; or

–highlight Cancel and press ENTER.

•If a panel menu contains more options than can be displayed in one

panel, the word “more” appears at the bottom of the menu. To access

the additional options, either scroll down using the z button or the

PAGE UP/DOWN (CH yz) button.

Info Box

Video Window

•When you open the

TV Guide

On Screen

™

system,

the current program

appears in the Video

Window.

•As you scroll through

the listings, the Video

Window will change

to display the selected

program.

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)

•The lock/unlock icon indicates the status of the Video Window.

•You can set the Video Window to remain on a single channel (locked) or to

change channels (unlocked) as you navigate through listings.

To lock/unlock the Video Window:

Press the SPLIT button on the remote control to toggle between locking

and unlocking the Video Window.

—or—

Highlight a channel logo or the LISTINGS Service Bar Label and press

MENU to display the option to lock/unlock the Video Window.

#01E_058-061_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:19 AM60

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV Guide On Screen™ Icons

ICON NAME DESCRIPTION

Info Button •Additional Info Box information is available, or the Info Box has additional sizes.

Progress Bar •Elapsed time in current show.

•Progress bar appears in LISTINGS and SEARCH and when the Info Button is pressed while watching TV.

HDTV •Show is presented in high-definition TV, if available.

New •Show is new (not a repeat).

Stereo •Show is available in stereo.

Dolby Digital •Show is available with Dolby Digital 5.1 audio (digital channels only).

CC •Closed captioning is available for the show.

TV Rating •TV rating for the show.

Record Once •Show is set to Record Once.

•Other frequencies are Daily (manual recording only),

Regularly, and Weekly.

Record Off •Show is set to Record but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).

Record •Recording is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).

Suspended •Recording resumes when the conflict no longer exists.

Remind Once •Show is set to Remind Once.

•Other frequencies are Daily (manual reminding only),

Regularly, and Weekly.

Remind Off •Show is set to Remind but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).

Remind •Reminder is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).

Suspended •Remind resumes when the conflict no longer exists.

Info Box

•An Info Box contains information about a show, Service, or Panel Ad, or

provides general help (for example, for a panel menu).

•An Info Box for a program in the LISTINGS screen can have up to three

sizes: Small, Large, or “No.”

–Press INFO on the remote control to cycle among the sizes.

–The default Info Box size is Small. To change the default size, open the

SETUP Service screen (see page 70).

•The Info Button icon ( ) appears on the Info Action Bar if the Info

Box size can change and/or if there are additional Info screens. Press INFO

on the remote control to change the size and/or to display additional Info

screens.

•In some instances, the INFO button on the remote control is used to page

forward (for example, if there are additional pages of information in a Panel

Ad, a Channel Ad, or help text).

Info Action Bar

Small Info Box

Large Info Box

Navigating the TV Guide On Screen™ system (continued)

#01E_058-061_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:20 AM61

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

The TV Guide On Screen

™

system consists of five main services: LISTINGS, SEARCH, RECORDINGS, SCHEDULE, and SETUP.

Note:

•For the RECORDINGS service to display, an IEEE1394 recording device must be connected to the television (see Chapter 2); otherwise, only

four services display. Recording to other devices, such as a VCR, are possible from within the LISTINGS service.

•When using the TV Guide On Screen™ system to record a program for the first time, it is recommended that you perform a test recording to

make sure your system is set up properly.

•If the power is cut or the plug becomes disconnected during timer recording, any recorded contents will be lost.

•If the TV power cord is unplugged for an extended period of time, it may take up to 24 hours with the TV in standby mode (power cord

plugged in and power OFF) to download the entire TV Guide On Screen™ program schedule. It may take up to a week before an entire

program schedule is available. Be sure to follow the instructions under “TV Guide On Screen™ Reminder” on page 45.

LISTINGS screen

•When you open the TV Guide On Screen

™

system,

LISTINGS is always the first service displayed.

•With LISTINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO

to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.

•Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within LISTINGS

to do the following:

–View eight days of show listings

–Read show descriptions

–Tune directly to a show currently airing

–Set a show to Remind (e.g., start time, frequency, automatic

power ON, auto-tune TV)

–Set a show to Record (e.g, start/end time, frequency)

–Lock and unlock the Video Window

–Access panel ads and channel ads

•Use the Number buttons on the remote control to jump to a

specific channel’s listings.

•To watch a show (if on now), highlight the show and press

ENTER.

•To display the Episode Options panel menu for a particular

show, highlight a show and press MENU.

Episode Options panel menu

From the Episode Options panel menu, you can choose to set a

recording, set a reminder, or tune to the channel. The following

are descriptions of the buttons.

GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no

information, and returns to the Service Bar.

TUNE TO CHANNEL / WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system and tunes to the channel of the highlighted

show (if the show airs in the future) or tunes to the show (if the

show is currently airing). The button label changes according to

whether the show is currently airing or not.

SET RECORDING: Displays the Record Options panel menu,

from which you can set the show to record. For additional

information, see “SCHEDULE screen” and “Record features”

on page 66.

SET REMINDER: Displays the Remind Options panel menu,

from which you can set a reminder for the show. For additional

information, see “SCHEDULE screen” on page 66 and

“Remind features” on page 68.

CANCEL: Closes the menu, changes no information, and

returns to the highlighted show.

TV Guide On Screen™ Services

#01E_062-067_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:20 AM62

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Example: Category search

1. From the SEARCH screen, press z to highlight a category

(in this example, MOVIES).

2. Press z to highlight a subcategory (in this example, ALL).

3. Press ENTER to display a list of all movies, organized by

date and time.

4. Highlight a show and press ENTER to watch (if on now)

or press MENU to display the Episode Options panel

menu. (See “Episode Options panel menu” on page 62.)

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

SEARCH screen

•SEARCH allows you to find shows by keyword,

alphabetically, or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports,

Children, Educational, News, Variety, Series).

•With SEARCH highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to

display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.

•Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within SEARCH.

#01E_062-067_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:20 AM63

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

SEARCH screen (continued)

Example: Keyword search

Keyword search lets you enter a word(s) to find a particular

show by category or for every show title that matches.

1. From the SEARCH screen, highlight KEYWORD, and

then press ENTER.

2. Highlight NEW SEARCH in the panel menu, and then

press ENTER.

3. The Search Options panel menu opens. Highlight

CATEGORY, and then use the arrow keys to highlight a

category to search (All, HDTV, Children, Sports, etc.).

4. After highlighting a category, press z to highlight ENTER

KEYWORD, and then press ENTER.

5. The keyboard is displayed. Use the arrow keys to highlight

a character and then press ENTER to display it. When

finished entering all characters, highlight DONE and press

ENTER.

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

6. A list of all matching shows for that keyword is displayed.

7. Highlight a show and press ENTER to display all airings.

Then highlight a specific listing and press ENTER to watch

(if on now) or press MENU to display the Episode Options

panel menu. From the Episode Options menu, you can

choose to set a recording or reminder, or tune to the

channel (see “Episode Options panel menu” on page 62.)

The TV Guide On Screen

™

system stores all the keywords you

create.

To edit or delete a keyword:

From the SEARCH/KEYWORD screen, highlight the

keyword you want to edit or delete, and then press MENU

to display the Search Options panel menu, with the

following options:

–GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no

information, and returns to the Service Bar.

–EDIT SEARCH: Displays the keyboard, from which you

can change the keyword.

–DELETE SEARCH: Displays the Confirmation panel

menu. Select YES to delete the search or NO to close the

panel menu.

–CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no

information, and returns to the highlighted keyword.

#01E_062-067_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:21 AM64

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

RECORDINGS screen

The RECORDINGS service screen displays a list of previously

recorded or currently recording shows on an IEEE1394

recording device connected to the TV (see Chapter 2).

Note: RECORDINGS will not appear in the Service Bar unless you

have an IEEE1394 video recording device connected to one of the

IEEE1394 ports on the TV. See Chapter 2 for details.

For additional details, see “Record features” on page 66.

•With RECORDINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press

INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the

screen.

To choose the way recordings are displayed:

1. Highlight RECORDINGS on the Service Bar, and press

MENU to display the Recording Options panel menu.

2. Press yz to choose between View As and Sort By, as

described below.

View As: Press x • to choose between the following:

•List—Displays every recorded episode for a show (see

example in Screen B, at right).

Note: In List view, highlight an episode to display an Info

Box with show information. Press MENU to display the

Episode Options panel menu (see “Episode Options

panel menu” on page 62).

•Group—Displays recorded shows without listing every

recorded episode (see example in Screen A, at right).

Note: In Group view, highlight a show and press ENTER

to view all recorded episodes. Press ENTER again to

collapse the episode list.

Sort By: Press x and • to choose between the following:

•Title—Displays recorded shows in alphabetical order (see

example in Screen A, at right).

•Date—Displays recorded shows by date and time, with

most recent first (see example in Screen B, at right).

3. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and

then press ENTER again to close the panel menu and

display the recordings with the selected options.

Screen A

Screen B

To view a recording, you can do one of the following:

•Highlight an episode and press ENTER to view it now. The

episode either starts from the beginning or from where it

was last stopped (if viewed previously).

•Highlight an episode and press MENU to display the

Episode Options panel menu, with the following options:

–GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no

information, and returns to the Service Bar.

–RESUME: Starts from the beginning or from where it

was last stopped (if viewed previously).

–PLAY FROM BEGINNING: Starts from the beginning,

even if stopped previously.

–DELETE EPISODE: Deletes the episode from the

RECORDINGS list and deletes the recording from the

IEEE1394 recording device. A Confirm panel menu

displays. Press YES to delete the episode or NO to close

the panel menu.

–CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no

information, and returns to the highlighted show.

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television

programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

you to civil and criminal liability.

#01E_062-067_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:21 AM65

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

SCHEDULE screen

The SCHEDULE service screen allows you to review, edit, or

delete Record and Remind events you set previously.

•With SCHEDULE highlighted in the Service Bar, press

INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close

the screen.

•Highlight an event and press MENU to display the Schedule

Options panel menu, with the following options:

–GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no

information, and returns to the Service Bar.

–WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide On Screen

™

system

and tunes to the highlighted show.

–DELETE RECORDING: Removes the recording from

the schedule. A Confirm panel menu displays. Press YES

to delete the recording or NO to close the panel menu.

–EDIT RECORDING: Opens a menu in which you can

change existing recording information.

–SET REMINDER: Opens a menu in which you can set a

reminder for the show (Record is not cancelled).

–CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no

information, and returns to the highlighted show.

An icon identifies the event type. For more details, see “Record

features,”at right, and “Remind features” on page 68.

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

Record features

You can set a show to Record, or edit the record settings for a

show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are

three ways to set a show to Record, as described below.

1) Set a show to Record using the REC key on the

remote control

Press REC on the remote control to record the show Once

with current default settings (start and end recording on

time). Each time you press REC, you change the Record

frequency (but not the default settings) among Once

(default), Regularly, Weekly, and Cancel.

Note: The related Record icon appears on the show tile

each time you press REC. See “Record icons,” on page 67.

2) Set a show to Record from a panel menu

1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the

Episode Options panel menu.

2. Highlight SET RECORDING and press ENTER to

display the Record Options panel menu.

3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or • to

choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Off.

4. Highlight the START field, and press x or • to choose

in the range from 120 minutes early to 120 minutes late

or On Time (default = On Time).

5. Repeat step 4 for the END field.

6. Highlight the RECORDER field and press x or • to

choose the recording device.

Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.

7. Highlight the KEEP UNTIL field and press x or • to

choose how long you want to keep the Record event.

Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.

8. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,

and press ENTER again to close the menu.

A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the

show tile. See “Record icons” on page 67.

Note: For connected IEEE1394 recording devices only.

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the

menu, change no information, and return to the

highlighted show.

Note: You can change the default values of the Record Options

panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on page 71.

#01E_062-067_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:22 AM66

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

3) Manually set a show to Record

1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press

MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.

2. Highlight NEW MANUAL RECORDING and press

ENTER to display the Record Options panel menu.

Press yzx • to move through the options.

Press the Number buttons or yzx • to change the

information, as necessary.

3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will

need to set the start and end time for the recording. For

details, see “Set a show to Record from a panel menu” on

the previous page.

Note: When setting a Manual Recording, the frequency

option “Daily” is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Record

icons,” below right, for a description of Record icons.

4. When finished entering the information in the fields,

press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,

and press ENTER again to close the menu.

A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the

show tile. See “Record icons,” below right.

Note: Manual recording is listed by channel number.

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the

menu, change no information, and return to the

highlighted show.

Recording notification banner

•If the TV is not on, the recording occurs as scheduled.

•If the TV is on and you are watching the channel that is set to

record, the recording occurs as scheduled.

•If the TV is on and you are watching a channel other than

the one that is set to record, a notification banner (illustrated

below) appears on-screen before recording starts. At that time

you can choose to start or cancel recording.

The default highlighted item in the notification banner is

“Change channel; start recording.” If no change is made

within 3 minutes, the notification banner will close

automatically, the channel will change to the one set to

record, and the recording will occur as scheduled. If you want

to cancel the recording, select “Don’t change; cancel

recording” in the notification banner and press ENTER.

Record features (continued)

Record conflict

A conflict message appears for the following reasons:

•A show set to Record overlaps with any part of another

show previously set to Record.

•A show set to Record overlaps with a show previously set to

auto-tune. (For auto-tune details, see “Remind features” on

page 68.)

Select one of these options:

•Record Anyway—This show will override an existing show

set to Record or auto-tune.

•Don’t Record This Show—Cancels the Recording.

Record icons

Following is a description of the Record icons that will appear

on the tile for a show set to Record.

•Record Once —Records the show one time.

•Record Regularly —Records the show every time the

show airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.

•Record Weekly —Records the show every time the show

airs on the same day of the week and on the same channel,

and starts at the same time.

•Record Daily —Records on the same channel and at the

same start time every weekday (Monday through Friday).

Note: This icon displays for manual recordings only.

•Record Suspend —Recording is Suspended due to a

schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).

•Record Off —Keeps the Recording in the Schedule list

but will not record this show until the frequency is changed.

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television

programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the

you to civil and criminal liability.

When using the TV Guide On Screen™ system to record a program for the

first time, it is recommended that you perform a test recording to make

sure your system is set up properly.

#01E_062-067_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:23 AM67

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

Remind features

You can set a Reminder to perform the following functions:

•Automatically turn on the TV (if off) at the scheduled

reminder time, and tune the TV to the channel of the show

for which you set the reminder.

•Automatically tune the TV, at the scheduled reminder time,

to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder.

•Display an on-screen notification banner (reminding you that

the show is about to start), from which you can choose to

tune the TV to the show’s channel or cancel the reminder.

You can set a show reminder, or edit the reminder settings for a

show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are

two ways to set a show reminder, as described below.

1) Set a show Reminder from a panel menu

1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the

Episode Options panel menu.

2. Highlight SET REMINDER and press ENTER to

display the Remind Options panel menu.

3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or • to

choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly or Off.

4. Highlight the POWER ON TV field, and press x or •

to choose either Yes (to turn on the TV automatically, if

off, at the scheduled Reminder time) or No (default).

5. Highlight the AUTO TUNE TV field, and press x or •

to choose either Yes (to automatically tune the TV to the

channel you are setting the Reminder for at the

scheduled Reminder time; the TV must be on at the

time) or No (default).

Note: You can change the default values of the Remind

Options panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on

page 71 for details.

6. Highlight the WHEN field (to set a time for displaying

the reminder screen), and press x or • to choose in the

range from 15 minutes early to 15 minutes late or On

Time (default = 1 minute early).

7. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,

and press ENTER again to close the menu. A Remind

icon for the selected frequency appears on the show tile.

See “Remind icons” on page 69.

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the

menu, change no information, and return to the

highlighted show.

2) Manually set a show Reminder

1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press

MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.

2. Highlight NEW MANUAL REMINDER and press

ENTER to display the Remind Options panel menu.

Press yzx • to move through the options.

Press the Number buttons or yzx • to change the

information, as necessary.

3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will

need to set the start and end time for the reminder. For

details, see “Set a show reminder from a panel menu,”

at left.

Note: When setting a Manual Reminder, the frequency

option “Daily” is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Remind

icons,” on the following page, for a description of Reminder

icons.

4. When finished entering the information in the fields,

press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,

and press ENTER again to close the menu.

A Remind icon for the selected frequency appears on the

show tile. See “Remind icons” on the following page.

Note: Manual reminders are listed by channel number.

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the

menu, change no information, and return to the

highlighted show.

#01E_068-071_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:23 AM68

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

Reminder notification banner

Based on your option settings, a notification banner will appear

on-screen, if your TV is on at the scheduled Reminder time.

At that time you can either press ENTER to hide the Reminder

banner, or highlight the show and press ENTER to tune to

the show.

If no choice is made within 3 minutes, the notification banner

closes automatically and completes the highlighted item (default

is HIDE REMINDERS).

Note: If more than two reminders are set for the same time,

arrows appear on the Reminder notification banner. Press yz

to highlight the shows.

Remind conflict

A conflict message appears for the following reasons:

•A show set with an auto-tune Reminder has the same start

time as an existing auto-tune Reminder.

•A show set with an auto-tune Reminder overlaps with a

scheduled Recording.

Select one of these options:

•Auto-Tune Anyway—This show will override an existing

show set to auto-tune.

•Proceed, No Auto-Tune—Set the show as a Reminder but

do not auto-tune.

•Don’t Set This Reminder—Cancels the Reminder.

Remind features (continued)

Remind icons

Following is a description of the Remind icons that will appear

on the tile for a show set to Remind.

•Remind Once —Displays a show reminder one time.

•Remind Regularly —Displays a show reminder every

time the show airs on the same channel and starts at the same

time.

•Remind Daily —Displays a show Reminder every

weekday (Monday through Friday) for the same channel and

start time.

Note: This icon displays for manual reminders only.

•Remind Suspend —Reminder is Suspended due to a

schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).

•Remind Off —Keeps the Reminder in the Schedule list

but will not display a reminder until you change the

frequency.

#01E_068-071_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:24 AM69

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

SETUP screen

After you complete the initial TV Guide On Screen

™

setup (as

described in Chapter 5), you can change the following settings:

•Change system settings

•Change channel display

•Change default options

Highlight a choice, press ENTER, and follow the on-screen

instructions.

With SETUP highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to

display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.

Change system settings

This option appears only after you have completed the initial

TV Guide On Screen

™

setup process (as described in Chapter 5).

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE SYSTEM

SETTINGS and press ENTER.

2. Press ENTER again

to display the

Confirming Your

Settings screen.

3. Highlight one of the

options, press

ENTER, and follow

the on-screen

instructions.

Change channel display

This option allows you to edit channel information that appears

in LISTINGS, including the following:

•Reorder the position the channels appear in LISTINGS.

•Change the “tune channel” number.

Note: The “tune channel” is the channel on which you receive

astation. For example, two viewers in the same zip code may

receive the same station on different channel numbers,

depending on whether they have Cable service or are using a

cable box.

•Switch a channel to one of the following settings:

–On (channel is always displayed in LISTINGS)

–Off (channel is never displayed in LISTINGS)

–Auto-Hide (channel is displayed in LISTINGS only

when program information is available)

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE CHANNEL

DISPLAY and press ENTER.

2. Highlight the channel row you want to edit and press

ENTER to display the Grid Options panel menu.

3. To edit the options, press INFO and follow the on-screen

instructions.

#01E_068-071_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:25 AM70

Black

Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen™ interactive program guide

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV Guide On Screen™ Services (continued)

Change default options

This option allows you to change default settings in the

following categories:

•General Defaults

•Record Defaults

•Remind Defaults

General defaults

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT

OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Highlight GENERAL DEFAULTS and press MENU to

display the General defaults panel menu.

3. Enter the following information in the panel menu fields:

•BOX SIZE: The initial Info Box size when you open the

TV Guide On Screen

™

system. Choices are No, Small

(default), Large, and Last Used.

•BOX CYCLE: The Info Box size rotation when you press

INFO on the remote control when the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system is open. Choices are No Only, Small

Only, Large Only, No & Small, No & Large, Small &

Large, and All (default).

•AUTO GUIDE: Automatic entry into the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system when the TV is powered on. Choices

are On (default) and Off.

Note: Set the AUTO GUIDE to Off if you do not want the

TV Guide On Screen™ system to open every time you turn

on the TV.

4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and

press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the

changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with no

changes).

SETUP screen (continued)

Record defaults

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT

OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Highlight RECORD DEFAULTS and press MENU to

display the Record Defaults panel menu.

3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields

(start time, end time, recorder choice, how long to keep a

Record event, the quality of the recording). See “Record

features” on page 66 for details on entering values in these

fields.

4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and

press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the

changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with

no changes).

Remind defaults

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT

OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Highlight REMIND DEFAULTS and press MENU to

display the Remind Defaults panel menu.

3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields

(power On TV, auto-tune, when to display the Remind

screen). See “Remind features” on page 68 for details on

entering values in these fields.

4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and

press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the

changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with

no changes).

#01E_068-071_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:25 AM71

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Using the TV’s features

To select the video input source to view:

1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the

TV side panel.

2. Press 0–9 to select the input source you want to view, which

will depend on the input terminals you used to connect

your devices (see Chapter 2).

The current signal source displays in the top right corner of

the Input Selection screen.

Input Selection

ANT 1

ANT 1ANT 1

Video 1

Video 2

Video 3

ColorStream HD1

ColorStream HD2

HDMI 1

ANT 2

-/ to Select

INPUT

HDMI 2

Note:

•When the Input Selection screen is open, you also can use the yz

buttons on the remote control (or the CHANNEL yz buttons on

the side panel) to change the input.

•You can repeatedly press INPUT on the remote control or

TV/VIDEO on the TV side panel to change the input.

•To select an IEEE1394 input source, press the TheaterNet DEVICE

button on the remote control (see page 31 and 50).

•If an IEEE1394 device is the current input, it will appear at the

bottom of the Input Selection list; however, it will not display in the

list if you change the input source.

•You can label the video input sources according to the specific

devices you have connected to the TV (see “Labeling the video

input sources” on the next page).

•The source can be “hidden.” See page 73 for details.

INPUT

Selecting the video input source to view

Numbers

Remote control

TV/VIDEO

TV side panel

CHANNEL

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:25 AM72

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

You can label each video input source according to the type of

device you connected to each source, from the following preset

list of labels:

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

4. Press x or • to select the desired label for that input source.

If a particular input is not used, you can select “Hide” as

the label, which will cause that input to be “grayed out” in

the input list and skipped over when you press INPUT on

the remote control.

Note: If you select “Hide” for all of the input labels, the POP

feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the POP

feature, the message “Not available” will appear on-screen.

5. To save the new input labels, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory default labels, highlight

Reset and press ENTER.

Input labeling example:

The screen below left shows the default Input Selection screen

(with none of the inputs labeled). The screen below right is an

example of how you could label the inputs if you had connected

a DVD player to VIDEO 1, Cable TV to VIDEO 2, an audio

receiver to VIDEO 3, a video recorder to ColorStream HD1,

and a DTV set-top box to HDMI 1, and a satellite/DSS set-top

box to HDMI 2. Also note that the ColorStream HD2 input is

labeled “Hidden,” which means that the input will be skipped

over when INPUT or TV/VIDEO is pressed.

ANT 2

-/ to Select

INPUT

Input Selection ANT 1

ANT 1ANT 1

Video 1

Video 2

Video 3

ColorStream HD1

ColorStream HD2

HDMI 1

HDMI 2

Input Selection ANT 1

ANT 1ANT 1

DVD

Cable

Audio Receiver

Video Receiver

ColorSteram HD2 (Hidden)

DTV

ANT 2

-/ to Select

INPUT

Satellite/DSS

Input Selection screen Input Selection screen with

with no inputs labeled all inputs labeled except input 5,

which has been hidden.

To clear the input labels:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER.

3. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Note: If you set up a device in TheaterNet, its input label will

not be cleared unless you remove the device from TheaterNet

(see page 50).

Labeling the video input sources

– – (default label)

Hide (to hide an unused input in the Input Selection

window)

Audio Receiver

VCR

Video Recorder

Laser Disk

Compact Disc

DVD

DTV

Satellite/DSS

Cable

Game Console

Note:

• If you set up devices in TheaterNet,™ the associated inputs are

automatically labeled and cannot be relabeled until you remove the

device from TheaterNet (see page 50).

• If you set up a cable box in VIDEO 1, that input will be labeled

automatically and cannot be relabeled until you remove the device

from the TV Guide On Screen™ setup.

•You cannot select IEEE1394 devices through the Input Selection

window; however, you can select and control IEEE1394 devices

through TheaterNet (see page 50).

To label the video input sources:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER.

3. Press y or z to highlight the video source you want to

label.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Home CH Setup

Favorite Channels

Closed Caption Advanced

Input Labeling

Closed Caption Mode

Off

English

Menu Language

Preferences

Done

Input Labeling

Video 1 DVD

Video 2 Cable

Video 3 Audio Receiver

ColorStream HD 1 Video Receiver

ColorStream HD 2 Hide

HDMI 1 DTV

HDMI 2 Satellite/DSS

ANT 2

Reset

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM73

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the ChannelBrowser™

The channel browser stores the most recently viewed channels (up to 32) in the channel history. This feature allows you to:

•Keep a separate, temporary* history of the last 32 channels tuned from each of three inputs: ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box.

*Note: Turning off the TV will clear the channel history for all three inputs.

•Quickly surf and tune your recently viewed channels from the channel browser banner (illustrated below).

•Surf via Browse mode (to immediately tune channels as you highlight them in the channel browser banner) or Select mode (to surf

over channels in the browser banner before you select one to tune).

•Set a “HOME” channel for the ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs.

Tuning channels

To tune to a channel in Browse mode:

1. While watching TV, press x ( ) or •() to open the

channel browser banner and surf back to a previous channel

or forward to the next channel in the channel history.

In Browse mode, when you stop on a channel number in

the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow

outline and the TV will automatically tune to the channel.

2. Press EXIT to close the channel browser banner.

Note: The channel browser close automatically if you do not

make a selection within 60 seconds.

To tune to a channel in Select mode:

1. While watching TV, press x ( ) or •() to open the

channel browser banner and surf back to a previous channel

or forward to the next channel in the channel history.

In Select mode, when you stop on a channel number in

the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow

background but the TV will not automatically tune to the

channel.

2. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel.

3. Press EXIT to close the channel browser banner.

To open the channel browser banner: Press x ( ),

• ( ), or ENTER on the remote control.

–Press x ( ) to surf back from the most recently viewed channel through the last 32 channels that were tuned from the current

input, which are automatically stored in the channel history for the current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box only).

–Press • ( ) to surf forward from the previous channels in the channel history up to the most recently viewed channel.

Active channel

status

(Displays in this area

only if available.)

Highlighted channel

(Displays with a yellow

background

in Select mode.

Displays with a yellow

outline

in Browse mode.)

Channels stored

in the channel

history

Active channel

(In Browse mode, because the highlighted

channel is tuned automatically, the active

channel and the highlighted channel

will always be the same.)

Home channel instructions

[Press

x ( )

• ( )

to surf the other channels

in the channel history.]

Current mode

(Select or Browse)

Current

input Current

antenna type

(cable or TV)

Home channelResolutionActive

channel

number

Channel call

letters

(if available)

Elements of the channel browser banner

To toggle between Browse mode and Select mode:

After opening the channel browser banner, press y or z to toggle between Browse mode and Select mode. The “Current mode” field

on the channel browser banner will flash green.

Note: The channel browser banner opens in Browse mode by default.

In Browse mode, the highlighted channel number is outlined

in yellow and the channel will be tuned to automatically.

In Select mode, the highlighted channel number has a

yellow background. Press ENTER to tune to the channel.

12-3

12345678

Select Mode ANT 1 CABLE 3 XYZ 480p 17-2

ABCD-DTV 26-1

QRS 17-2

TUV 3

XYZ

Hold HOME key

3 sec to program

3 2 102-1

Browse Mode

ANT 1 CABLE Ch.102-1 1080i Ch.3

Hold HOME key

3 sec to program

3 2 102-1

Select Mode

ANT 1 CABLE Ch.102-1 1080i Ch.3

Hold HOME key

3 sec to program

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM74

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Tuning channels (continued)

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Adding and clearing channels in the

channel history

Adding channels to the channel history

The channel browser automatically creates a history of the

last 32 channels that were tuned in the current input (ANT 1,

ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only). A separate history will be

stored for each of these inputs.

If you change the input you are viewing:

a) you will begin a channel history for that input if one did

not exist; or

b) you will return to the existing channel history for that input

if one had already been started.

The channel browser will store the following channels:

•All channels that are tuned using the numeric buttons on the

remote control.

•All channels that are tuned for at least 7 seconds using the

CH yz buttons or the FAV CH yz buttons on the remote

control.

Note:

•The channel browser banner will not appear when the POP double

window is open; however, channels tuned while the POP double

window is open will be added to the channel browser history for the

current input.

•The channel browser banner will not appear in the FAV SCAN

(favorite scan) multi-window. Channels that appear in the FAV SCAN

multi-window will not be added to the channel browser history;

however, channels that are tuned from the FAV SCAN multi-window

for at least 7 seconds will be added to the channel history.

Clearing channels from the channel history

•Turning off the TV will clear all three channel histories

(ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box).

•Removing the CableCARD

™

will clear the channel history

for the ANT 1 input.

•Reconfiguring the ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box input

will clear the channel history for the newly configured

input(s).

Note:

See page 46 for details on configuring the antenna inputs.

Setting a channel as the “Home” channel

for an input

To set a channel as Home using the remote control:

1. Tune the TV to the channel you would like to set as the

Home channel for the current antenna input.

2. Press and hold the HOME ( ) button on the remote

control for 3 seconds. When the Home channel is saved,

the channel browser banner will appear at the bottom of

the screen with the home icon flashing green.

Note: You can set a different Home channel for each input

(ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only).

To set a channel as Home using the menus:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Home CH Setup and press ENTER. The Home

CH Setup window will display.

Done

Home CH Setup

ANT 2

Cable Box

Reset

ANT 1

Note: "Cable Box" will appear in the Home CH Setup

window only if you connected a cable box to your TV.

3. Use the yz buttons to select the input for which you want

to set the Home channel.

4. Use the numeric and dash (–) buttons on the remote

control to enter the desired Home channel for each input.

5. To save your entries, highlight Done and press ENTER.

To clear your entries, highlight Reset and press ENTER.

To tune to the Home channel:

While an input that has a set

Home channel is active, press the

HOME ( ) button on the

remote control.

Note: If you press the HOME

button while an input other than

an antenna or Cable Box input is

selected, the TV will tune to the

most recently tuned Home

channel and input.

Using the ChannelBrowser™ (continued)

HOME ( )

x/BACK

•/NEXT

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM75

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Tuning your favorite channels

To tune to the channels you programmed as Favorite Channels,

see page 48.

Tuning to the next programmed channel

To tune to the next programmed channel:

Press CHANNEL yz on the remote control or TV side panel.

Note:

•This feature will not work unless you program channels into the

TV’s channel memory (see page 47).

•If you are recording a digital channel, you will only be able to

change analog channels while the recording is in progress. If you

are recording an analog channel, you will only be able to change

digital channels while the recording is in progress. This is

because the TV tuner that is being recorded (digital or analog)

will be locked on the channel that is currently recording.

Tuning to a specific channel

(programmed or unprogrammed)

Tuning analog channels:

Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote

control. For example, to select channel 125, press 1, 2, 5.

Tuning digital channels:

Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote

control, followed by the – (dash) button and then the sub-

channel number. For example, to select digital channel 125-1,

press 1, 2, 5, –, 1.

Note: If a digital channel is not programmed—either through

the automatic channel scan (page 47) or the channel add/

delete function (page 48)—you will have to tune the RF

channel using the Channel Number and Dash buttons on the

remote control.

Tuning channels (continued)

Switching between two channels using

Channel Return

The Channel Return feature allows you to switch between two

channels without entering an actual channel number each time.

1. Select the first channel you want to view.

2. Select a second channel using the Channel Number buttons

(and the dash (–) button if selecting a digital channel).

3. Press CH RTN on the remote control. The previous

channel will display. Each time you press CH RTN, the TV

will switch back and forth between the last two channels

that were selected.

Note: If you press CH RTN from a non-antenna input, the TV

will return to the last-viewed ANT input and channel. If you

are currently recording a program, this feature will not be

available.

Switching between two channels using

SurfLock™

The SurfLock™ feature temporarily “memorizes” one channel

in the CH RTN button, so you can return to that channel

quickly from any other channel by pressing CH RTN. To

memorize a channel in the CH RTN button:

1. Select the channel you want to program into the CH RTN

button.

2. Press and hold CH RTN for about 2 seconds until the

message “Channel Memorized” appears on the screen. The

channel has been programmed into the CH RTN button.

3. You can then change channels repeatedly, and when you

press CH RTN, the memorized channel will be selected.

The TV will return to the memorized channel one time only.

Once you press CH RTN and then change channels again, the

CH RTN memory will be cleared and the button will function

as Channel Return, by switching back and forth between the last

two channels that were selected.

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

CH RTN

Channel Numbers

CHANNEL yz

—

(dash)

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM76

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

You can view many program formats in a variety of picture

sizes—Natural, TheaterWide 1, TheaterWide 2, TheaterWide 3,

and Full—as described below and on the next page.

The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary

depending on the format of the program you are viewing. Select

the picture size that displays the current program the way that

looks best to you.

Your picture size preferences can be saved for each input on your

TV.

To select the picture size:

1. Press PIC SIZE on the remote control.

2. While the Picture Size menu is on-screen, press the

corresponding number button (0–4) to select the desired

picture size.

Picture Size

Natural

TheaterWide 1

TheaterWide 2

TheaterWide 3

Full

-/ to Select

PIC SIZE

Note:

•You also can repeatedly press PIC SIZE to select the desired

picture size (or press yz on the remote control while the

Picture Size screen is open).

•“Full” may not be available for some program formats (it will

be “grayed out” in the Picture Size screen).

Natural picture size

•The image is displayed close to its originally formatted

proportion. Some program formats will display with

sidebars and/or bars at the top and bottom.

Natural picture size example: The way the image displays will

vary depending on the format of the program you are currently

watching.

PIC SIZE

Numbers

Selecting the picture size

Conventional picture on a

conventional TV screen

Conventional picture in Natural size on

your wide-screen TV

Note:

You also can select the picture size using the

menu system. Select Picture Size in the Video/

Theater Settings menu. Select the input you

wish to save your picture size settings for. To

save your settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER.

Done

Theater Settings

Picture Size Natural

Picture Scroll

Cinema Mode Film

Auto Aspect Ratio On

Reset

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE

EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY

Avoid displaying stationary images on your

Plasma display for extended periods of

time. Fixed (non-moving) images

(including, but not limited to, PIP/POP

windows, closed captions, video game

patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers,

and websites) and special formats that do

not use the entire screen, can become

permanently ingrained in the Plasma

display and cause subtle, but permanent,

ghost images. This type of damage is

NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.

See pages 4 and 5 for details.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM77

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

TheaterWide 1 picture size (For 4:3 format

program)

•The center of the picture remains close to its

original proportion, but the left and right

edges are stretched wider to fill the screen.

TheaterWide 2 picture size (for letter box

programs)

•The picture is stretched wider to fill the width

of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller.

•The top and bottom edges of the picture are

hidden. To view the hidden areas, see

“Scrolling the TheaterWide

picture” on the

next page.

TheaterWide 3 picture size (for letter box

programs with subtitles)

•The picture is stretched wider to fill the width

of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller.

•The top and bottom edges are hidden. To view

the hidden areas (such as subtitles or captions),

see “Scrolling the TheaterWide

picture” on

the next page.

Full picture size (for 16:9 [480i, 480p] source

programs only)

•If receiving a squeezed 4:3 format program, the

picture is stretched wider to fill the width of

the screen, but not stretched taller.

•None of the picture is hidden.

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Selecting the picture size (continued)

TheaterWide 2 picture size example

Full picture size example

TheaterWide 1 picture size example

TheaterWide 3 picture size example

Note:

•If you select one of the TheaterWide

picture

sizes, the top and bottom edges of the

picture (including subtitles or captions) may

be hidden. To view the hidden edges, either

scroll the picture (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only)

or try viewing the program in Full or Natural

picture size.

•When selecting the picture size, the way

the image displays will vary depending on

the format of the program you are

currently watching.

Using these functions to change the

picture size (i.e., changing the height/

width ratio) for any purpose other than

your private viewing may be prohibited

under the Copyright Laws of the United

States and other countries, and may

subject you to civil and criminal liability.

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE

EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY

Avoid displaying stationary images on your

Plasma display for extended periods of

time. Fixed (non-moving) images

(including, but not limited to, PIP/POP

windows, closed captions, video game

patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers,

and websites) and special formats that do

not use the entire screen, can become

permanently ingrained in the Plasma

display and cause subtle, but permanent,

ghost images. This type of damage is

NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.

See pages 4 and 5 for details.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM78

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Using the auto aspect ratio feature

When the auto aspect ratio feature is set to On, the picture size

is automatically selected when one of the following input

sources is received:

•A 480i signal from the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,

ColorStream HD-1, or ColorStream HD-2 input.

•A 1080i, 480i, 480p, or 720p signal from the HDMI input.

Note:

•The auto aspect ratio feature is not applicable to antenna or Cable input

sources.

•The auto aspect ratio feature is not available when the POP double-

window is open, the Freeze mode is active, or the TV Guide On Screen™

system is open.

To turn on the auto aspect ratio feature:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.

Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Video

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

3. In the Auto Aspect Ratio field, select On.

DoneReset

Theater Settings

Picture Size Natural

Picture Scroll -1

Cinema Mode Film

Auto Aspect Ratio On

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

To turn off the auto aspect ratio feature:

Select Off in step 3 above.

You can set separate scroll settings for TheaterWide 2 and

TheaterWide 3 modes for each input.

To set the scroll settings:

1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the

TV to select the input for which you want to set the picture

size and scroll settings.

2. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

3. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.

Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Video

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

4. In the Picture Size field, select either TheaterWide 2 or

TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other mode).

5. Press z to highlight the Picture Scroll field.

6. Press x or • to scroll the picture up and down as needed,

from –10 to +20.

Done

Theater Settings

Picture Size TheaterWide 3

Picture Scroll

Cinema Mode Film

Auto Aspect Ratio On

Reset

7. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture

(TheaterWide 2 and 3 only)

Automatic aspect size

Aspect ratio (automatically selected

of signal source when Auto Aspect is On)

4:3 normal Natural (with sidebars)

4:3 letter box TheaterWide 2

16:9 full Full

Not defined User-selected picture size

(no ID-1 data or ) (see pages 77–78)

HDMI aspect data)

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE

EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY

Avoid displaying stationary images on your

Plasma display for extended periods of

time. Fixed (non-moving) images

(including, but not limited to, PIP/POP

windows, closed captions, video game

patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers,

and websites) and special formats that do

not use the entire screen, can become

permanently ingrained in the Plasma

display and cause subtle, but permanent,

ghost images. This type of damage is

NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.

See pages 4 and 5 for details.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM79

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

When you view a DVD (480i signal; 3:2 pulldown processed)

from a DVD player connected to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2,

ColorStream HD1/HD2 (component video), or HDMI inputs

on the TV, smoother motion can be obtained by setting the

Cinema Mode to Film.

To set the Cinema Mode to Film:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.

Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Video

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

3. In the Cinema Mode field, select Film.

DoneReset

Theater Settings

Picture Size Natural

Picture Scroll -1

Cinema Mode

Auto Aspect Ratio On

Film

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

To set the Cinema Mode to Video:

Select Video in step 3 above.

Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only)

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM80

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the POP double-window feature

The POP (picture-out-picture) double-window feature splits the screen into two

windows so you can watch two programs at the same time.

To display a program in the POP window:

1. Select the program you want to watch in the main window.

2. Press SPLIT to open the POP double-window.

POPANT1

Video1

TV12

3. Press • to highlight the POP (right) window. When highlighted, the window

will have a green border.

4. Press INPUT to open the POP Input Selection window. Select the input source

for the POP window by pressing the corresponding Number button (0–9). The

current source displays in purple in the POP Input Selection window.

ANT 2

-/ to Select

INPUT

POP Input Selection

ANT 1ANT 1

Video 1

Video 2

Video 3

ColorStream HD1

ColorStream HD2

HDMI 1

HDMI 2

To close the POP window and tune to the highlighted window:

Press ENTER after highlighting the window you want to view as a normal picture.

To close the POP window:

Press SPLIT or EXIT.

Notes about recording:

•If the POP window is open and you attempt to start recording, the POP window will close and

recording will start.

• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to open the POP window

and the message “Not Available” will appear on-screen.

•It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other

than the TV’s remote control to start recording, you may be able to open the POP window during

the recording process. If this happens, the recorded audio will reflect the audio of the active window

(main or POP), which may not be the audio you intended to record.

SPLIT

Main window POP window

Using the POP features

Numbers

INPUT

Green border

(denotes active window)

Note:

•When the main window is in the ANT1 or ANT2

mode, the ANT1 and ANT2 inputs cannot be

selected for the POP window.

•When the main window is in Video 1/2/3,

ColorStream HD1/HD2, HDMI 1, or HDMI 2

mode, those inputs cannot be selected for the POP

window.

•You cannot view IEEE1394 source programs in the

POP window.

•You cannot view two video or two antenna sources

in both the main and POP windows simultaneously.

(You can view a video source in one window and

an antenna source in the other.)

•The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP

double-window is open. If you press FREEZE

when the double-window is open, the message

“Not available” will appear.

POP double-window

ENTER

•

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE

EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY

Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma

display for extended periods of time. Fixed (non-

moving) images (including, but not limited to, PIP/

POP windows, closed captions, video game

patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and

websites) and special formats that do not use the

entire screen, can become permanently ingrained

in the Plasma display and cause subtle, but

permanent, ghost images. This type of damage

is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See

pages 4 and 5 for details.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM81

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the POP features (continued)

Switching the speaker audio (main or POP)

While the POP window is open, press x or • to switch the sound (main or POP) that

is output from the TV speakers (and from the VARIABLE AUDIO OUT terminals).

The window with the active sound is outlined with a green border.

POP double-window aspect ratio

The POP double-window feature displays each picture according to its input signal

aspect ratio, as illustrated in the examples below.

480i 480i 480i

480p/720p/1080i

Example: Press xExample: Press •

Note:

•The auto aspect ratio feature (page 79) does not

operate in POP double-window mode.

•Aspect ratio is the ratio of width to height of the

picture.

x •

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE

EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY

Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma

display for extended periods of time. Fixed (non-

moving) images (including, but not limited to, PIP/

POP windows, closed captions, video game

patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and

websites) and special formats that do not use the

entire screen, can become permanently ingrained

in the Plasma display and cause subtle, but

permanent, ghost images. This type of damage

is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See

pages 4 and 5 for details.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM82

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

1. When viewing the TV, press FREEZE to make the picture a still picture.

2. To return to the moving picture, either press FREEZE again, press EXIT, or press

any other button.

Note:

•The FREEZE feature is not available when the POP double-window or FAV SCAN

multi-window is open. If you press FREEZE when either window is open, the message

“Not available” will appear.

•If the TV is left in FREEZE mode, after 15 minutes it will automatically release the

FREEZE mode and return to the moving picture.

Using the favorite channel scan feature

You can use this feature to quickly scan and tune the channels you programmed as

favorite channels from a nine-picture multi-window.

Note: To use the favorite channel scan feature, you must first program channels into the

favorite channel memory. See “Programming your favorite channels” on page 49.

To scan and tune your favorite channels:

1. Press FAV SCAN. The TV will display the channels you programmed as favorite

channels for the current ANT input in a nine-picture multi-window.

(To display the channels you programmed as favorite channels for the other input,

you must change antenna inputs first (page 72), and then press FAV SCAN.)

CABLE

123

456

789

4–1 4–2

611

2. Highlight the window for the channel you want to view:

•Either... press the channel’s multi-window position number (1-9, as illustrated

above, and not the actual channel number) to highlight the window;

•or... use the y z x • buttons to highlight the window.

The highlighted window will display as a moving picture.

3. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel and close the multi-window.

24–1 4–2

611

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the FREEZE feature

FAV SCAN

ENTER

x •

Using the FREEZE function for any

purpose other than your private viewing

may be prohibited under the Copyright

Laws of the United States and other

countries, and may subject you to civil

and criminal liability.

Still pictureMoving picture

EXIT

FREEZE

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE

EFFECTS ON PLASMA DISPLAY

Avoid displaying stationary images on your

Plasma display for extended periods of

time. Fixed (non-moving) images

(including, but not limited to, PIP/POP

windows, closed captions, video game

patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers,

and websites) and special formats that do

not use the entire screen, can become

permanently ingrained in the Plasma

display and cause subtle, but permanent,

ghost images. This type of damage is

NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.

See pages 4 and 5 for details.

#01E_072-083_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:26 AM83

Black

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Adjusting the picture

Selecting the picture mode

You can select your desired picture settings from four picture

modes, as described below.

To select the picture mode:

Press PIC MODE on the remote control.

The following popup menu appears on-

screen.

Picture Settings Mode: Standard

Mode Standard

Repeatedly press PIC MODE to cycle

among the modes or use x or • to

select the modes.

To select the picture mode using the menu system:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Video

3. In the Mode field, select the mode you prefer.

Done

Picture Settings

Mode Sports

Contrast 100

Brightness

Reset

ANT 1

Color

Tint

Sharpness

Picture Settings Mode: Standard

Mode Standard

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Note:

•The picture mode you selected is for the current input

selection only (ANT 1 in the example above). You can select

a different picture mode for each input selection.

•If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,

Standard, or Movie) and then change a picture quality setting

(for example, increase the contrast or change the color

temperature), the picture mode automatically changes to

Preference in the Picture Settings menu.

Adjusting the picture quality

You can adjust the picture quality (contrast, brightness, color,

tint, and sharpness) to your personal preferences.

To adjust the picture quality:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Video

3. Press y or z to select the picture quality you want to adjust

(Contrast, Brightness, Color, Tint, or Sharpness), and then

x and • to adjust the setting, as described in the table

above.

Done

Picture Settings

Mode Sports

Contrast 100

Brightness

Reset

ANT 1

Color

Tint

Sharpness

Picture Settings Mode: Preference

Sharpness 70

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the

Preference mode (see “Selecting the picture mode,” above left).

Selection x Pressing •

Contrast lower higher

Brightness darker lighter

Color paler deeper

Tint reddish greenish

Sharpness softer sharper

Mode Picture Quality

Sports Bright and dynamic picture (factory setting)

Standard Standard picture settings (factory setting)

Movie Lower contrast for darkened room (factory setting)

Preference Your personal preferences

PIC

MODE

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:28 AM84

Black

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Adjusting the picture (continued)

Using the color management feature

The color management feature allows you to adjust the hue and

saturation of 6 colors: red, green, blue, yellow, magenta, and

cyan.

To select Color Management preferences:

1. Press Menu and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Video

3. Highlight the Color Management field, and press ENTER.

Done

Color Management

Reset

CableClear Auto

Dynamic Contrast On

MPEG Noise Reduction Low

ANT 1

Advanced Picture Settings

Color Temperature Cool

4. Highlight Color Management, and then press x or • to

select On.

Done

Green

Blue

Yellow

Magenta

Color Managemant On

Red

Hue Saturation

Reset

Color Management

Cyan

–15

+15

5. Press y or z to highlight the color you want to adjust,

then press ENTER.

6. Press x or • to adjust the Hue or Saturation setting.

Hue +2

Saturation +2

Note: Pressing y or z will switch between the Hue and

Saturation adjusting windows.

7. Press Enter to return to the Color Management Window.

8. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Note:

•If you select Off in step 4 above, you cannot adjust the Hue or

Saturation.

•If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,

Standard, or Movie) and then change the Color Management

to “On”, the picture mode automatically changes to

Preference in the Picture Settings menu.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:29 AM85

Black

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Using CableClear

/DNR (digital noise

reduction)

The CableClear

digital noise reduction feature allows you to

reduce visible interference in your TV picture. This may be

useful when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal (especially

a Cable channel) or playing a noisy video cassette or disc. This

feature is enabled for 480i signals only.

Note: The CableClear/DNR feature does not function in

ColorStream, HDMI (DVI), ATSC, IEEE1394, and digital Cable

modes.

To select CableClear/DNR preferences:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Video

3. In the CableClear/DNR field, select your desired setting.

Done

CableClear Auto

Color Management

Color Temperature Cool

Dynamic Contrast On

MPEG Noise Reduction Low

Reset

ANT 1

Advanced Picture Settings

Note:

•If the current input is Antenna, Video 1, Video 2, or Video 3,

the menu will display the text “CableClear.” The available

selections are Off, Low, Middle, High, and Auto.

•If the current input is ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2 or

HDMI and the video resolution is 480i, the menu will display

the text “DNR.” The available selections are Off, Low, Middle,

High, and Auto. Auto will react proportionally to the strength

of the noise. Low, Middle, and High will reduce the noise in

varying degrees from lowest to highest respectively.

•If the current input is ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2, or

HDMI and the video resolution is not 480i, the menu will

display the text “DNR”.

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Adjusting the picture (continued)

Selecting the color temperature

You can change the quality of the picture by selecting from three

preset color temperatures (cool, medium, and warm), as

described below.

To select the color temperature:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Advanced Picture Settings

Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Video

Advanced Picture Settings

3. In the Color Temperature field, select the mode you prefer

(Cool, Medium, or Warm).

Done

Color Management

Reset

CableClear Auto

Dynamic Contrast On

MPEG Noise Reduction Low

ANT 1

Advanced Picture Settings

Color Temperature Cool

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Note:

If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,

Standard, or Movie) and then change the color temperature

mode, the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in

the Picture Settings menu.

Mode Picture Quality

Cool blueish

Medium neutral

Warm reddish

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:30 AM86

Black

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Adjusting the picture (continued)

Using MPEG noise reduction

The MPEG noise reduction feature allows you to reduce visible

interference caused by MPEG compression. Choices for MPEG

noise reduction are High, Medium, Low and Off. Off is

automatically selected when this feature is disabled (“grayed

out”). This feature is not available in the PC input mode.

To select MPEG Noise Reduction preferences:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Video

3. In the MPEG Noise Reduction field, select your desired

setting.

Done

Color Management

Reset

ANT 1

Advanced Picture Settings

CableClear Auto

Color Temperature Cool

Dynamic Contrast On

MPEG Noise Reduction Off

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Using dynamic contrast

When dynamic contrast is set to “On,” the TV will detect

changes in the picture quality that affect the appearance of your

contrast settings and automatically adjust the video.When

dynamic contrast is set to “Off,” the settings selected in the

Contrast field in Picture Settings will be used.

To select dynamic contrast preferences:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

Picture Settings

Advanced Picture Settings

Theater Settings

Video

3. In the Dynamic Contrast field, select either On or Off.

Done

Color Management

Reset

ANT 1

Advanced Picture Settings

CableClear Auto

Color Temperature Cool

Dynamic Contrast On

MPEG Noise Reduction Off

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Note:

If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (Sports,

Standard, or Movie) and then change the dynamic contrast to

“On,” the picture mode automatically changes to Preference in

the Picture Settings menu.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:30 AM87

Black

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Using the closed caption mode

Advanced closed captions

You can customize the closed caption display characteristics by

changing the text size, type, edge, color, and the background

color.

Note:

•This feature is available for digital channels only.

•You cannot set the Caption Text and Background as the same

color.

To customize the closed captions:

1. Press MENU and open

the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Closed

Caption Advanced and

press ENTER.

3. Press y or z to

highlight the

characteristic you want

to change, and then

press x or • to select the format for that characteristic.

4. To save the

new settings,

highlight

Done and

press

ENTER. To

revert to the

factory

defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER.

The closed caption mode has two options:

•Captions—An on-screen display of the dialog, narration,

and sound effects of TV programs and videos that are

closed captioned (usually marked “CC” in program guides).

•Text—An on-screen display of information not related to

the current program, such as weather or stock data (when

provided by individual stations).

To view captions or text:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Closed Caption Mode and then press •.

3. Press z or y to select the desired closed caption mode and

press ENTER.

Input Labeling

Menu Language

Home CH Setup

Favorite Channels

English

Closed Caption Advanced

Preferences

Off

Closed Caption Mode

Off

CC1

CC2

CC3

CC4

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

•To view captions:

Highlight CC1,

CC2, CC3, or

CC4. (CC1 displays

translation of the

primary language in

your area.)

Note: If the

program or video

you selected is not closed captioned, no captions will display

on-screen.

•To view text:

Highlight T1, T2,

T3, or T4.

Note: If text is not

available in your

area, a black

rectangle may

appear on your

screen. If this

happens, turn the Closed Caption Mode Off.

•To turn off the Closed Caption mode:

Select Off in step 3 above.

Note: A closed caption signal may not display in the following situations:

•When a videotape has been dubbed

•When the signal reception is weak

•When the signal reception is non-standard

Giant pandas eat leaves.

WORLD WEATHER

Temps Current

F C Weather

LONDON 51 11

MOSCOW

PARIS

ROME

TOKYO

57 14

53 12

66 19

65 18

Cloudy

Clear

Cloudy

Rain

Clear

Input Labeling

Menu Language

Home CH Setup

Favorite Channels

English

Closed Caption Advanced

Preferences

CC1

Closed Caption Mode

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Done

Advanced Closed Captions

Caption Size Auto

Auto

Caption Text Type

Caption Text Edge

Caption Text Color

Background Color

Reset

Auto

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON

PLASMA DISPLAY

Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma display for

extended periods of time. Fixed (non-moving) images (including,

but not limited to, PIP/POP windows, closed captions, video game

patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and websites) and

special formats that do not use the entire screen, can become

permanently ingrained in the Plasma display and cause subtle,

but permanent, ghost images. This type of damage is NOT

COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See pages 4 and 5 for

details.

Auto, Small, Standard, Large

Auto, Default, Mono w. Serif, Prof. w. Serif,

Mono w/o Serif, Prop w/o Serif, Casual,

Cursive, Small Capitals

Auto, None, Raised, Depressed, Uniform,

Left Drop Shadow, Right Drop shadow

Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue,

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

Auto, Black, White, Red, Green, Blue,

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

Caption Size

Caption Text Type

Caption Text Edge

Caption Text Color

Background Color

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:31 AM88

Black

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Digital closed captions

You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to select digital

closed caption services (if available), which will temporarily

override closed captions for digital channels only.

When such services are not available, the Digital CC/Audio

selector presents a default list of services. If the selected service is

not available, the next best service will be used instead.

To select digital closed captions:

1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.

2. Highlight Digital CC/Audio Selector and press ENTER.

Applications

TV Guide On Screen

Audio Player

Picture Viewer

Digital CC/Audio Selector

CableCARD

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

3. Press y or z to select Closed Caption, and then press x or

• to select the desired service.

CC 1Audio

Closed Caption Service 1

Using the closed caption mode (continued)

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:31 AM89

Black

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

RECALL

MUTE

Muting the sound

Press MUTE to partially reduce (1/2 Mute) or turn off (Mute)

the sound. Each time you press MUTE, the mute mode will

change in the following order.

→ 1/2 Mute → Mute → Volume →

If the closed caption mode is set to Off when you select

“MUTE” mode, the closed caption feature is automatically

activated. To mute the audio without automatically activating

the closed caption feature, use the VOL z button to set the

volume to 0. See “Using the closed caption mode” on page 88

for more information on closed caption modes.

Adjusting the audio

Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts

The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature allows you to

output high-fidelity stereo sound. MTS also can transmit a

second audio program (SAP) containing a second language,

music, or other audio information (when provided by individual

stations).

The MTS feature is not available when the TV is in VIDEO

mode. When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the

word “STEREO” or “SAP” appears on-screen when RECALL is

pressed.

To listen to stereo sound:

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

Audio Settings

Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup

Audio

3. In the MTS field, select Stereo.

Done

Audio Setup

MTS

Language

Speakers On

Optical Output Format Dolby Digital

Reset

Stereo

English

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,

highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Note:

•You can leave the TV in Stereo mode because it automatically

outputs the type of sound being broadcast (stereo or monaural).

• If the stereo sound is noisy, select Mono to reduce the noise.

To listen to an alternate language on an ATSC digital station

(if available):

Highlight the Language field in step 3 above, and then press x

or • to select the language you prefer.

To listen to a second audio program on an analog station (if

available):

Select SAP in step 3 above.

Note:

•A second audio program (SAP) can be heard only on those TV

stations that offer it. For example, a station might broadcast another

language as a second audio program. If you have SAP on, you will

see the current program on the screen but hear the other language

instead of the program’s normal audio.

•If you have SAP on and the station you are watching is not

broadcasting a second audio program, the station’s normal audio

will be output. However, occasionally there is no sound at all in SAP

mode. If this happens, set the MTS feature to Stereo mode.

VOL z

Using the digital audio selector

You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to conveniently

switch between audio tracks on a digital channel (for those

channels that have multiple audio tracks). This temporarily

overrides the audio track chosen by the language option under

Audio Setup.

1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.

2. Highlight Digital CC/

Audio Selector and press

ENTER.

3. Press y or z to select

Audio, and then press x

or • to select the desired

service.

Service 1

CC 1Audio

Closed Caption

Applications

TV Guide On Screen

Audio Player

Picture Viewer

Digital CC/Audio Selector

CableCARD

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:32 AM90

Black

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Using the StableSound

feature

The StableSound

feature limits the highest volume level to

prevent extreme changes in volume when the signal source

changes (for example, to prevent the sudden increase in volume

that often happens when a TV program switches to a

commercial).

To turn on the StableSound

feature:

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER.

Audio Settings

Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup

Audio

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

3. In the StableSound field, select On.

Done

Audio Settings

Bass 50

Treble

Reset

Balance

StableSound Off

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,

highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Note: The RESET function returns your audio adjustments to

the following factory settings:

Bass ............. center (50)

Treble .......... center (50)

Balance ........ center (0)

StableSound ... Off

To turn off the StableSound feature:

Select Off in step 3 above.

Adjusting the audio (continued)

Adjusting the audio quality

You can adjust the audio quality by adjusting the bass, treble,

and balance.

To adjust the audio quality:

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER.

Audio Settings

Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup

Audio

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

3. Press z or y to highlight the item you want to adjust

(Bass, Treble, or Balance).

Done

Audio Settings

Bass 50

Treble

Reset

Balance

StableSound Off

4. Press x or • to adjust the level.

•x makes the bass or treble weaker or increases the balance

in the left channel (depending on the item selected).

•• makes the bass or treble stronger or increases the balance

in the right channel (depending on the item selected).

5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,

highlight Reset and press ENTER.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:33 AM91

Black

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Adjusting the audio (continued)

Using the SRS WOW™ surround sound

feature

WOW

™

is a special combination of SRS Labs audio

technologies (SRS 3D, FOCUS, and TruBass) that creates a

thrilling surround sound experience with deep, rich bass from

stereo sound sources. Your TV’s audio will sound fuller, richer,

and wider.

To adjust the WOW

™

settings:

1. Put the TV in STEREO mode (see “Selecting stereo/SAP

broadcasts” on page 90).

2. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

3. Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER.

Audio Settings

Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup

Audio

4. Press z or y to highlight the WOW feature you want to

adjust, and then press x or • to adjust the item.

Done

Advanced Audio Settings

WOW: SRS 3D

WOW: FOCUS

WOW: TruBass Low

Reset

Off

Dolby Virtual

TruSurround On

•WOW: SRS 3D — To turn the surround sound effect On

or Off.

Note: If the broadcast is monaural, the 3D effect does not

work.

•WOW: FOCUS — To turn the vocal emphasis effect On

or Off.

•WOW: Tr uBass — To select the desired bass expansion

level (High, Low, or Off ).

5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Using the Dolby Virtual with SRS

TruSurround sound feature

The Dolby

Virtual surround sound feature allows you to enjoy

virtual surround sound from the TV’s speakers.

• If you connect a device (a game console, a DVD player or

a DTV receiver, etc.) with analog audio output to the

standard (analog) audio terminals on the TV, and the input

source is encoded with Dolby Surround sound or

Dolby Digital sound, the Dolby Virtual feature

operates as Virtual Dolby Surround (VDS). VDS

simulates Dolby Surround sound from the TV’s speakers.

To turn on the Dolby Virtual surround sound feature:

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER.

Audio Settings

Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup

Audio

3. Press y or z to highlight the Dolby Virtual TruSurround,

and then press x or • to select On.

Done

Advanced Audio Settings

WOW: SRS 3D

WOW: FOCUS

WOW: TruBass Low

Reset

Off

Dolby Virtual

TruSurround On

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

To turn off the Dolby Virtual surround sound feature:

Select Off in step 3 above.

Note:

•The Dolby Virtual TruSurround and WOW SRS 3D features cannot

be on at the same time. If you set one to On, the other will

automatically be set to Off.

•The Dolby Virtual TruSurround feature is enabled only when

receiving digital broadcasts.

______________

•WOW, TruSurround, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.

WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:34 AM92

Black

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Turning off the built-in speakers

Use this feature to turn off the TV speakers when you connect

an audio system to your TV (see “Connecting a digital audio

system” and “Connecting an analog audio system” on page 23).

To turn off the built-in speakers:

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

Audio Settings

Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup

Audio

3. In the Speakers field, select Off.

Done

Audio Setup

MTS

Language

Speakers On

Optical Output Format Dolby Digital

Reset

Stereo

English

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

To turn on the built-in speakers:

Select On in step 3 above.

Adjusting the audio (continued)

Selecting the optical audio output

format

Use this feature to select the optical audio output format when

you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digital audio

system to the Optical Audio Out terminal on the TV (see

“Connecting a digital audio system” on page 23).

To select the optical audio output format:

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

Audio Settings

Advanced Audio Settings

Audio Setup

Audio

3. In the Optical Output Format field, select either Dolby

Digital or PCM, depending on your device.

Done

Audio Setup

MTS

Language

Speakers On

Optical Output Format

Dolby Digital

Reset

Stereo

English

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

#01E_084-093_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:35 AM93

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Setting the sleep timer

You can set the sleep timer to turn off the TV after a set length

of time (maximum of 3 hours). The sleep timer turns off the TV

one time only, as opposed to the On/Off Timer, which turns off

the TV on a recurring basis.

To set the sleep timer:

Press SLEEP on the remote control to set the length of time until

the TV turns off. Repeatedly press SLEEP to increase the time in

10-minute increments or press y or z to increase or decrease the

time in 10-minute increments, to a maximum of 3 hours and 00

minutes.

To cancel the sleep timer:

Press SLEEP until it is set to 0.

To set the sleep timer using the on-screen menus:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Sleep Timer and press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

3. Press the Number buttons to enter the length of time in

10-minute increments.

Sleep Timer

Enter total minutes until the TV

turns off automatically (Maximum

180 minutes)

1 2 0

Cancel Done

4. Highlight Done and press ENTER.

Note:

•When a power failure occurs, the sleep timer setting may be cleared.

•To display the amount of time left on the sleep timer, press RECALL.

To display the remaining sleep time:

Press SLEEP.

SLEEP

Setting the On/Off Timer

You can use the On/Off Timer to turn the TV on and off at a

preset time on a recurring basis.

Note: You must first set the time (see page 55).

To set the On/Off Timer:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight On/Off Timer and press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

3. In the Day field, press x or • to select the recurrence

(Weekends, Weekdays, Every Day, etc).

On/Off Timer

Turn TV ON:

Weekends

Time (HH:MM)

TV ON Duration:

30 Minutes

Reset DoneCancel

Day

09 00 AM

4. Press z to highlight the Time field, and then use the

Number buttons to enter the time you want the TV to turn

on.

5. When the AM/PM field is highlighted, press • to select

AM or PM.

6. Press z to highlight the TV ON Duration field, and then

press x or • to select the length of time until the TV turns

off.

7. Highlight Done and press ENTER.

8. Turn off the TV. The TV will turn on automatically on the

day(s) and at the time you set. The TV will then turn off

automatically after the length of time you set in the TV

ON Duration field.

Note:

•When a power failure occurs, the On/Off Timer settings may

be cleared.

•To display the On Timer setting, press RECALL.

To turn off the On/Off Timer:

Select Not Set in step 3 above.

On/Off Timer

Turn TV ON:

Not Set

Day

Reset DoneCancel

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Sleep Timer

1h10m

Note: A message will display

on-screen when there is one

minute remaining on the sleep

timer.

#01E_094-097_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:36 AM94

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the PC setting feature

You can adjust the horizontal position/size, vertical position/size,

clock phase, and sampling clock. This feature will be grayed out

on the menu unless there is a PC connected to the TV (See

“Connecting a personal computer (PC)” on page 29.)

To set the PC setting:

1. Confirm a PC is connected (see “Connecting a personal

computer (PC)” on page 29).

2. Repeatedly press INPUT to select PC input mode. (See

“Selecting the video input source to view” on page 72.)

3. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

4. Highlight PC Settings and press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

Setup

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

2 Sec

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

5. Press y or z to highlight the item you want to adjust.

6. Press x or • to make the appropriate adjustments.

Done

PC Settings

Horizontal Width 0

Vertical Position

Reset

Horizontal Position 0

Vertical Height

Clock Phase

Sampling Clock

• Horizontal Position/Vertical Position:

Adjusts picture left/right and up/down. The adjustment range

is within ±5 from center.

(The adjustable range may vary depending on the input mode.)

• Horizontal Width/Vertical Hegiht:

Adjusts picture width of Horizontal and picture height of Vertical.

The adjustment range is within ±5 from center.

• Clock Phase:

This function is to reduce noise and sharpen the picture.

The adjustment range is within ±15 from center.

• Sampling Clock:

This function is to minimize periodic vertical stripes on the

screen.

The adjustment range is within ±15 from center.

Using the Long Life feature

The long life settings (Picture shift, Gray level, Reverse, and

White) help to reduce the risk of phosphor burn-in of the

plasma screen.

Picture Shift

With Picture Shift set to on, the picture imperceptibly moves

around the screen intermittently to reduce the risk of phosphor

burn-in of the plasma screen.

Note: To reduce the risk of phosphor burn-in, the default setting for

the Picture Shift function is On.

To activate the picture shift feature:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Long Life and press •.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

On/Off Timer

PC Settings

Auto

2 Sec

15 min

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

AVHD Skip Time

Setup

Long Life

Picture Shift

Gray Level

Reverse

White

3. Press y or z to highlight the Picture Shift, and then press

•.

4. Press y or z to select On.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

On/Off Timer

PC Settings

Auto

2 Sec

15 min

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

AVHD Skip Time

Setup

Long Life

Picture Shift

Gray Level

Reverse

White

Off

To deactivate the picture shift feature:

Select Off in step 4 above.

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON

PLASMA DISPLAY

Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma display for

extended periods of time. Fixed (non-moving) images (including,

but not limited to, PIP/POP windows, closed captions, video game

patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and websites) and

special formats that do not use the entire screen, can become

permanently ingrained in the Plasma display and cause subtle,

but permanent, ghost images. This type of damage is NOT

COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See pages 4 and 5 for

details.

#01E_094-097_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:37 AM95

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Using the Long Life feature (continued)

Gray Level

The gray level feature will set the sidebar to three different levels

of darkness. Sidebars are the blanks spaces on either side of a 4:3

viewing area. Lowering the darkness of the sidebars will help

reduce screen burn in.

To set the gray level of the sidebars:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Long Life and press •.

3. Press y or z to highlight the Gray Level, and then press •.

4. Press y or z to select your desired level of darkness.

(1–Black, 2–Dark Gray or 3–Gray).

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Picture Shift

Gray Level

Reverse

White

On/Off Timer

PC Settings

Auto

2 Sec

15 min

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

AVHD Skip Time

Setup

Long Life

Note:

•The gray level feature does not affect video being viewed in

16:9 aspect ratio.

•When receiving a signal that has sidebars (e.g., 4:3 aspect

ratio video over a 1080i or 720p signal), the gray level feature

will not be applied to the sidebars.

Reverse

The picture is displayed alternately between positive image and

negative image to reduce the risk of phosphor burn-in of the

screen.

This function is effective for a still pattern image.

To activate the reverse:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Long Life and press •.

3. Press y or z to highlight the Reverse, and then press

ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Picture Shift

Gray Level

Reverse

White

On/Off Timer

PC Settings

Auto

2 Sec

15 min

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

AVHD Skip Time

Setup

Long Life

The positive image and negative image will alternate.

To return to the normal picture:

Press any button.

White

A white pattern is displayed on the whole screen.

To display the white pattern:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Long Life and press •.

3. Press y or z to highlight the White, and then press

ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

On/Off Timer

PC Settings

Auto

2 Sec

15 min

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

Slide Show Interval

AVHD Skip Time

Setup

Long Life

Picture Shift

Gray Level

Reverse

White

To return to the normal picture:

Press any button.

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE ADVERSE EFFECTS ON

PLASMA DISPLAY

Avoid displaying stationary images on your Plasma display for

extended periods of time. Fixed (non-moving) images (including,

but not limited to, PIP/POP windows, closed captions, video game

patterns, TV station logos, stock tickers, and websites) and

special formats that do not use the entire screen, can become

permanently ingrained in the Plasma display and cause subtle,

but permanent, ghost images. This type of damage is NOT

COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. See pages 4 and 5 for

details.

#01E_094-097_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:38 AM96

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features

Displaying the Channel Banner

To display the channel banner:

Press RECALL on the remote control.

The following information will display in the channel banner

(if applicable):

•Current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, etc.)

•If ANT 1 or ANT 2 is the current input, whether it is

Cable TV (“CABLE”) or

off-air (“TV”)

•Channel number (if in

ANT 1 or ANT 2 mode)

•Signal strength indicator

(bar graph in lower right

corner of banner; for

ATSC signal only)

Note: The signal strength indicator will react to fading and

increasing signals and could display longer than the normal

channel banner screen.

•Time (if set)

•On/Off timer settings (if set)

•Remaining time on sleep timer (if set)

•Remaining time on game timer (if set)

•Stereo or SAP audio status

•V-Chip rating status

•Picture size

•Tuner hold* (if applicable)

*If you are recording on one tuner (for example, the digital

tuner), you will be able to change channels on the other tuner

only (the analog tuner in this example). The tuner from which

you are recording is “on hold” (i.e., locked) so your

recordings will not be affected by channel changes.

•Aspect ratio

To close the channel banner:

Press RECALL again.

Understanding the auto power off

feature

The TV will automatically turn itself off after approximately 15

minutes if it is tuned to a vacant channel or a station that

completes its broadcast for the day. This feature functions in

ANT 1 and ANT 2 modes only.

Understanding the last mode

memory feature

If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV, the Last

Mode Memory feature automatically turns on the TV when

the power is resupplied.

Note: You should unplug the TV’s power cord if it is possible

that you will be away from the TV for an extended period of time

after the power is restored.

STEREO Tuner Hold: On

5:32pm CABLE

81-1

ANT 1

NC-17

On Timer: Weekdays 12:00pm

Sleep Timer: 18 min.

Game Timer: 28 min.

Natural

1080i

Sample channel banner screen

#01E_094-097_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:38 AM97

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Enable Rating Blocking

Edit Rating Limits

Channels Block

Input Lock Off

Off

Front Panel Lock

Game Timer

New PIN Code

Locks

2. Press z, which displays the PIN code entry screen.

•The Lock System screen (below) appears if a PIN code has

not been stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to

enter a new four-digit code, enter the code a second time to

confirm, and press ENTER.

Please enter a 4 digit PIN code

Confirm PIN code

Cancel Done

Lock System

•The Locks/Active screen (below) appears if the PIN code is

already stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to enter

your four-digit code and press ENTER.

Locks Active

Please enter the 4 digit PIN code

Cancel

****

Done

If the wrong PIN code is entered, the message “Incorrect PIN

code, please try again!” appears. Highlight Retry and press

ENTER. Enter the code again and press ENTER.

When the correct PIN code is entered, the Locks menu opens.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Enable Rating Blocking

Edit Rating Limits

Channels Block

Input Lock Off

Off

Front Panel Lock

Game Timer

New PIN Code

Locks

Using the Locks menu

The Locks menu includes the Enable Rating Blocking, Edit Rating Limits, Channels Block, Input Lock, Front Panel Lock, Game

Timer, and New PIN Code features. You can use these features after entering the correct PIN code.

If you cannot remember your

PIN code

While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL

four times within five seconds. The PIN code will be cleared and

you can enter a new PIN code.

Entering the PIN code

Changing your PIN code

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press z to highlight New PIN Code and press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Enable Rating Blocking

Edit Rating Limits

Channels Block

Input Lock Off

Off

Front Panel Lock

Game Timer

New PIN Code

Locks

5. Press the Number buttons to enter a new four-digit code.

Retype the numbers to confirm the PIN code you entered.

6. Press ENTER. The new PIN code is now active.

Please enter a 4 digit PIN code

Confirm PIN code

Cancel Done

New PIN Code

****

#01E_098-101_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:39 AM98

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

TV PG L V–

NONE

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu

Some TV programs and movies include signals that classify the

content of the program (violence, sex, dialog, language). The

V-Chip feature in this TV detects the signals and blocks the

programs according to the ratings you select. (See the tables at

right for rating descriptions.)

Note: Rating blocking is a function of the V-Chip feature in this

TV, which supports the U.S. V-Chip system only.

To block and unblock TV programs and movies:

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press z to displays the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press z to highlight Enable Rating Blocking.

5. Press • and then z to select On, and then press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Enable Rating Blocking

Edit Rating Limits

Channels Block

Input Lock Off

Off Off

Off

Front Panel Lock

Game Timer

New PIN Code

Locks

6. Press z to highlight Edit Rating Limits and press ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Enable Rating Blocking

Edit Rating Limits

Channels Block

Input Lock Off

Off

Front Panel Lock

Game Timer

New PIN Code

Locks

The Edit Rating Limits screen (below) appears.

7. Press yzx • and then press ENTER to select the level of

blocking you prefer. A box with an “×” is a rating that will

be blocked. As you highlight a rating, a definition for the

rating appears at the bottom of the screen. See notes at

right.

8. When done selecting the ratings you want to block,

highlight Done and press ENTER.

Edit Rating Limits

(V-CHIP)

D L S V

TV-Y

TV-Y7

TV-G

TV-PG

TV-14

TV-MA

"None" Rated or "No Rating"

This program is designed for children age 7 and adove.

Movies

Children

Youth

Cancel

Done

PG-13

NC-17

Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip)

Ratings Description and Content themes

TV-MA Mature Audience Only (This program is specifically designed

to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for

children under 17.)

L) Crude or indecent language S) Explicit sexual activity

V) Graphic violence

TV-14 Parents Strongly Cautioned (This program contains some

material that many parents would find unsuitable for children

under 14 years of age.)

D) Intensely suggestive dialog L) Strong, coarse language

S) Intense sexual situations V) Intense violence

TV-PG Parental Guidance Suggested (This program contains

material parents may find unsuitable for younger children.)

D) Some suggestive dialog L) Infrequent coarse language

S) Some sexual situations V) Moderate violence

TV-G General Audience (Most parents would find this program

suitable for all ages.)

TV-Y7,Directed to Older Children (This program is designed

TV-Y7FV for children age 7 and above. Note: Programs in which

fantasy violence may be more intense or more combative

than other programs in this category are designated Y7FV.)

TV-Y All Children (This program is designed to be appropriate for

all children.)

Independent rating system for broadcasters

Note:

•If you place an “X” in the box next to “None” Rated or “No Rating,”

programs rated “None” or “No Rating” will be blocked. However, if

the program does not provide any rating information, nothing will be

displayed in the banner and ratings blocking will not take effect.

•To display the rating of the program you are watching, press

RECALL on the remote control. If it is not rated, the word “NONE”

appears.

Rating Description and content themes

XX-rated (For adults only)

NC-17 Not intended for anyone 17 and under

RRestricted (Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult)

PG-13 Parents Strongly Cautioned (Some material may be

inappropriate for children under 13)

PG Parental Guidance Suggested (Some material may not be

suitable for children)

GGeneral Audience (Appropriate for all ages)

Independent rating system for movies

#01E_098-101_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:40 AM99

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Locking video inputs

You can use the Input Lock feature to lock the video input

sources (VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, ColorStream HD-1,

ColorStream HD-2, HDMI 1/HDMI 2, PC) and channels 3

and 4. You will not be able to view the input sources or channels

until you turn off the input lock.

To lock the video inputs:

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press z to highlight Input Lock and press •.

5. Press y or z to select the level of video input locking you

prefer, as described

below:

Video: Locks VIDEO 1,

VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,

ColorStream HD1/

HD2, HDMI 1/

HDMI 2 and PC.

Video+: Locks VIDEO

1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, ColorStream HD1/HD2, HDMI

1/HDMI 2, PC, and channels 3 and 4. Select Video+ if

you use the antenna terminal to play a video tape.

Note: Make sure the POP is not on channel 3 or 4.

Off: Unlocks all video input sources.

6. Press ENTER.

Note: When a CableCARD™ is inserted, Video+ will behave the same as

Video lock.

Blocking channels

With the Channels Block feature, you can block specific

channels. You will not be able to tune blocked channels unless

you clear the setting first.

To block channels:

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press z to displays the

PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter your four-digit PIN

code and press ENTER

(see page 97 for details).

4. Press z to highlight

Channels Block and

then press ENTER.

5. Using the yz x •

buttons, select the input for which you want to change the

rating limits (ANT1, ANT2, or Cable Box, if connected)

and press ENTER.

A list of the channels available for that input will be displayed

along with the call letters for each channel, if available.

6. Press yz to highlight

the channel you want to

block, then press

ENTER, which puts an

“×” in the box next to

that channel.

Repeat step 6 for other

channels you want to block.

8. Highlight Done and

press ENTER.

To unblock individual channels:

In step 6 above, press yz to highlight the channel you want to

unblock, and then press ENTER to remove the “×” from the

box, and highlight Done, and then press ENTER.

To block all channels at once:

Highlight Block All in step 6 above, and then highlight Done,

and press ENTER.

To unblock all locked channels at once:

Highlight Allow All in step 6 above , and then highlight Done,

and press ENTER.

Note: Channel blocking may

not take effect if you have a

cable box connected and use

the cable box controls to

change channels.

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu

Unlocking programs temporarily

If you try to watch a TV program that exceeds the rating limits

you set, the TV enters program lock mode. You can either

unlock the program temporarily or select a non-locked program

to watch.

To temporarily unlock the program:

1. Press MUTE.

2. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER. If the

correct code is entered,

the program lock mode

is released and the

normal picture appears.

All locking is disabled

until the TV is turned

off, and will be enabled

when the TV is turned on again.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Edit Rating Limits

Channels Block

Input Lock Off

Off

Front Panel Lock

Game Timer

New PIN Code

Locks

Enable Rating Blocking

Locks Active

Enter PIN code to temporaily un-

block.

Cancel

****

Done

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Enable Rating Blocking

Edit Rating Limits

Channels Block

Input Lock Off

Off

Front Panel Lock

Game Timer

New PIN Code

Locks

Off Off

Video

Video +

Channels Block ANT 1

1ANT 1

ANT 2

Cable Box

Cancel

Done

Block All

Allow All

Channels Block ANT 1

1ANT 1

ANT 2

Cancel

Done

Block All

Allow All

Cable Box

#01E_098-101_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:41 AM100

Black

101

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu

Using the GameTimer™

You can use the GameTimer to set a time limit for playing a

video game (30–120 minutes). When the GameTimer is

activated, the TV enters VIDEO LOCK mode and locks out

the input source for the video game device.

To set the GameTimer

™

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press z to highlight Game Timer and press •.

5. Press y or z to select the length of time until the Video

Lock is activated (30, 60, 90, or 120 minutes) and press

ENTER.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Enable Rating Blocking

Edit Rating Limits

Channels Block

Input Lock Off

Off

Front Panel Lock

Game Timer

New PIN Code

Locks

Off

60 min

90 min

120 min

Off

30 min

To cancel the GameTimer

™

Select Off in step 5 above.

To deactivate the video lock once the GameTimer has

activated it:

Set the Video Lock to Off (see “Locking video inputs” on page

100).

Note:

•A message will appear on-screen when 10 minutes, 3

minutes, and 1 minute remain on the GameTimer.

•If the TV loses power with time remaining on the GameTimer,

when power is restored the TV will enter VIDEO LOCK mode

(as if the GameTimer had expired) and you will have to

deactivate the video lock (as described above).

Using the panel lock feature

You can lock the side panel buttons to prevent your settings

from being changed accidentally (by children, for example).

When the panel lock is On, none of the controls on the TV side

panel will operate except POWER.

To lock the side panel:

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press z to highlight Front Panel Lock.

5. Press • to highlight On and press ENTER. When the side

panel is locked and a button on the side panel except

POWER button is pressed, the message “Not Available”

appears.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Enable Rating Blocking

Edit Rating Limits

Channels Block

Input Lock Off

Off Off

Off

Front Panel Lock

Game Timer

New PIN Code

Locks

To unlock the side panel:

Highlight Off in step 5 above, or press and hold the

VOLUME x button on the TV side panel for about 10

seconds until the volume icon appears on-screen.

TV side panel

VOLUME x

#01E_098-101_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:41 AM101

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

You can use the memory card slots on the TV side panel to view

compatible JPEG files or play compatible MP3 files stored on a

memory card (see “Memory card specifications” below and at

right). You can display JPEG files in thumbnail mode or view

them as a slide show.

Note:

•Never remove the memory card or turn off the TV while

using the memory card. Doing so may result in loss of data and/

or damage to the memory card and/or TV. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT

COVERED BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.

•It is recommended that you back up your memory card data. Toshiba

is not liable for any damage caused by the use of any memory card

with this TV. Toshiba will not compensate for any lost data or

recording(s) caused by the use of such cards.

•For instructions on using your digital camera, refer to the owner’s

manual for your camera.

• For instructions on using your memory card, refer to the owner’s

manual for your memory card.

•Failure to take proper care of a memory card may prevent display of

pictures or playback of MP3 files from the card or result in damage to

the memory card and/or TV. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY

YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY. See “Memory card care and

handling” on page 105.

•The technical criteria set out in this owner’s manual are meant as a

guide only.

•Please be advised that you must obtain permission from the

applicable copyright owners to download copyrighted content,

including music files, in any format, including the MP3 format, prior to

the downloading thereof. Toshiba has no right to grant and does not

grant permission to download any copyrighted content.

Memory card specifications

■

Supported memory card types:

– Memory Card (ver. 1.0)

– MMC (MultiMediaCard

™

)

– Memory Stick

™

(Pro)

– xD-Picture Card

™

(16MB-512MB)

– CompactFlash

memory card (Type1)

Note: The picture viewer and audio player support FAT16 formatted

cards only. Other memory cord formats (including but not limited to

FAT32 or NTFS) are not supported.

■

Maximum memory card capacity:

512 MB.

■

Maximum displayable JPEG image size:

8 MB.

•JPEG files larger than 8 MB will not display.

■

Maximum MP3 file size:

•MP3 files have no size limit other than the maximum capacity

of the memory card.

■

Maximum displayable JPEG image resolution:

6000x4000

pixels.

■Maximum number of files per directory:

370.

•All files over the 370th in a single directory will not display/play.

• Files in directories more than 10 levels down from the top level

directory will not display/play.

■

Maximum number of files per memory card:

JPEG = 1,000;

MP3 = 200.

•All JPEG files over the 1,000th on a single memory card will not

display.

•All MP3 files over the 200th on a single memory card will not play.

■

File name restrictions:

•File names cannot contain the following characters: \ / : ? “ < > | .

• File names must contain US-ASCII characters only.

•The maximum file name length is 255 characters.

•The memory card reader recognizes only “.mp3” and “.jpg”

file extensions.

•The MP3 player supports only ISO-8859-1 (US-ASCII/Western

European) character sets for MP3 meta-data (e.g, artist name,

album name, song title, etc.)

■

JPEG picture viewer:

•The picture viewer supports JPEG format images only.

•The files on your memory card must be in a file and directory

format compatible with the TV or they will not display on the TV.

•Images processed and/or edited on a personal computer (PC)

may not display properly or at all. Some digital cameras may store

images in a format that is not compatible with the TV.

■

MP3 audio player:

•The audio player supports MP3 format files only.

•The files on your memory card must be in a file and directory

format compatible with the TV or they will not play.

•Files processed and/or edited on a personal computer (PC) may

not play properly or at all. Some MP3 files may be in a format that

is not compatible with the TV.

•MP3 files must have the following format:

-MPEG1 (ISO/IEC 11172-3) Layer3.

- Sampling frequency—MPEG1: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz.

-Bitrate—MPEG1: 32–320 kbps.

-Channels—Stereo, Joint stereo, Dual channel, Single channel.

-ID3 Ver. 1, Ver. 2.

______________

• is a trademark.

•MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG

and licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association).

•Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

•xD-Picture Card is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.

•Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash

and CF logo

registered trademarks.

Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3

audio player

#01E_102-105_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:42 AM102

Black

103

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Using the JPEG picture viewer

2. In a few seconds, the images automatically display on-

screen, with one as a large picture and six in thumbnail

format.

Picture Viewer

1 of 6

May 28 04

3 of 6

Jan 18 04

4 of 6

May 12 04

5 of 6

Sep 18 03

6 of 6

Oct 10 10

2 of 6

Jan 8 04

Rotate Next Slide Show Exit

EXIT

3. Press x to rotate the large picture 90° counterclockwise.

Picture Viewer

1 of 6

May 28 04

3 of 6

Jan 18 04

4 of 6

May 12 04

5 of 6

Sep 18 03

2 of 6

Jan 8 04

Rotate Next Slide Show Exit

EXIT

6 of 6

Oct 10 10

4. Press • to rotate the large picture 90° clockwise.

Picture Viewer

1 of 6

May 28 04

3 of 6

Jan 18 04

4 of 6

May 12 04

5 of 6

Sep 18 03

2 of 6

Jan 8 04

Rotate Next Slide Show Exit

EXIT

6 of 6

Oct 10 10

5. Press y or z to select another picture as the large picture.

6. Press ENTER to view your pictures in a slide show.

During the slide show:

•To stop on an image during the slide show, press ENTER.

To resume the slide show, press ENTER again.

•To rotate the picture, press x or •, and then press ENTER.

•To select another image, press y or z, and then press

ENTER.

•To stop the slide show and return to the picture viewer,

press CH RTN.

•To stop the slide show and return to the regular TV screen,

press EXIT.

xD-Picture Card

(Secure Digital)

memory card

TV side panel

Memory card slots

Secure Digital

™

MMC

(MultiMediaCard)

Memory Stick

➔

CompactFlash

memory card

➔

CompactFlash

ejector button

{

➔

Note: If you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on the same

memory card, the JPEG picture viewer will start automatically

when you insert the memory card in the TV. To start the audio

player, you must first press EXIT to close the picture viewer and

then start the audio player while the memory card is still

inserted. See “To start the MP3 audio player when a memory

card is already inserted,” on page 105. You cannot use the

picture viewer and audio player at the same time.

To view digital photos on your TV:

1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card

slot on the side of your TV.

Note:

•Never insert more than one memory card at time.

•Be sure to insert the card correctly—label side facing left and

the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into the

memory card slot.

•When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly, the

ejector button pops out (see illustration below).

Chapter 10: Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player

#01E_102-105_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:43 AM103

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Using the JPEG picture viewer (continued)

To set the slide show interval:

Note: The picture viewer must be closed before you can set the

slide show interval.

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Slide Show Interval and press ENTER. Select the

interval from the menu sidebar (2, 5, 10, 15, or 20

seconds).

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Installation

Sleep Timer

On/Off Timer

2 SecSlide Show Interval

Setup

2 sec

15 sec

10 sec

20 sec

5 sec

PC Settings

HDMI 1 Audio

Auto

HDMI 2 Audio

To close the picture viewer:

Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the regular

TV screen.

To restart the picture viewer while the memory card is still

inserted:

1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.

2. Highlight Picture Viewer and press ENTER.

Applications

TV Guide On Screen

Audio Player

Picture Viewer

Digital CC/Audio Selector

CableCARD

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

3. Follow the steps under “To view digital photos on your

TV” on the previous page.

To close the picture viewer and remove the memory card:

1. Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the

regular TV screen.

2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button

and then pull the card straight out from the TV. For all

other memory cards, pull the card straight out from the TV.

Using the MP3 audio player

Note:

• If you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on the same memory card, the

JPEG picture viewer will start automatically when you insert the

memory card in the TV. To start the audio player, you must first press

EXIT to close the picture viewer and then start the audio player while

the memory card is still inserted. See “To start the MP3 audio player

when a memory card is already inserted,” next page. You cannot

use the picture viewer and audio player at the same time.

•Make all the desired adjustments to the surround, bass, treble, and

balance before starting the MP3 audio player.

•Please be advised that you must obtain permission from the

applicable copyright owners to download copyrighted content,

including music files, in any format, including the MP3 format, prior to

the downloading thereof. Toshiba has no right to grant and does not

grant permission to download any copyrighted content.

To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is not

already inserted:

1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card

slot on the side of your TV (see page 102 for details).

Note:

•Never insert more than one memory card at a time.

•Be sure to insert the card correctly—label side facing left and

the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into the

memory card slot.

•When a CompactFlash memory card is inserted correctly, the

ejector button pops out (see page 102).

2. If you have only MP3 files on the memory card, the audio

player will launch within a few seconds after being inserted

and begin playing the first MP3 file on the memory card.

Audio Player

Navigate Select Exit

EXIT

Title

Ser No.1 in D, Op.11... SCO/Sir Charles...

Requiem, Op. 5: IV. R... Robert Shaw/Atla...

Rapsodie Espagnole:... Jesus Lopez-Cobo...

III. Sanctus: Sanctu... Boston Baroque/M...

Piano Sonata, K. 545... A-M Classical

Pathétique Sonata, m... A-M Classical

A-M Classical

Chopin Prelude No. ... Andrys

Piano Sonata, K. 545...

A-M Classical

Moolight Sonata, mo...

A-M Classical

Moolight Sonata, movement

Artist

Vol

3. Press yz x • to navigate to the rewind, pause, fast

forward, skip backward, skip forward, volume, and mute

buttons, or to select another MP3, and then press ENTER.

To use the mute function

Press yz x • to select the (mute) button, and then press

ENTER. See page 90 for details on muting the sound.

NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE

VIEWER BEFORE REMOVING THE

MEMORY CARD.

If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures, the card

and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE

IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.

Chapter 10: Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player

#01E_102-105_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:44 AM104

Black

105

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 10: Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player

•Use index labels made exclusively for your specific brand of

memory card. Do not use commercially sold labels, which

can cause a malfunction when the card is inserted or

ejected.

•If the image does not appear correctly, or the audio file does

not play correctly, clean the metallic area of the memory

card using a soft, dry, lint-free, anti-static cloth and then

reinsert the card.

•Prevent contact of the metallic area on the memory card

from coming in contact with dust, dirt, or other foreign

particles. Do not touch the metallic area of the memory

card with your hands or otherwise handle it with anything

other than a soft, dry, lint-free, anti-static cloth.

Note: Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused by the use

of any memory card with this TV. Toshiba will not compensate

for any lost data or recordings caused by the use of such

cards.

To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is

already inserted:

1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.

2. Highlight Audio Player and press ENTER.

3. Press yz x • to

navigate to the rewind,

pause, fast forward, skip

backward, skip forward,

volume, and mute

buttons, and then press

ENTER.

Note: After 30 seconds a

screen saver will appear. To access the screen saver immediately,

press any button on the remote control.

To close the MP3 audio player:

Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the regular

TV screen.

To close the MP3 audio player and remove the memory card:

1. Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the

regular TV screen.

2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button

and then pull the card straight out from the TV. For all

other memory cards, pull the card straight out from the TV.

Using the MP3 audio player (continued)

NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE AUDIO

PLAYER BEFORE REMOVING THE

MEMORY CARD.

If you remove the memory card while playing MP3 files, the card

and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE

IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.

Applications

TV Guide On Screen

Audio Player

Picture Viewer

Digital CC/Audio Selector

CableCARD

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Memory card care and handling

#01E_102-105_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:44 AM105

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Connecting your TV to the Network

Setting up the Network connection

Setting up the Network address

The following explains how to manually input settings such as

the IP address, etc.

Note:

•You must first set up THINC™ to connect to a home network,

see page 30.

•This feature is only for remotely scheduling recordings and

reminders. You will not be able to access the Internet through

the TV.

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Network

menu will appear.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Basic Network Setup

Recording Email Setup

Home File Server Setup

Network

3. Highlight Basic Network Setup, and press ENTER. The

screen to confirm automatically obtaining the Network

address appears. Highlight No, and then press ENTER.

Basic Network Setup

Obtain network address automatically?

Yes No

Note: If the network address is automatically obtained, see

“To obtain the Network address automatically” at right.

4. Basic Network Setup menu appears.

Basic Network Setup

Please enter your Network Address Information

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway(Router)

DNS(Domain Name Saver)

Cancel Done

Use yzx • or the number buttons to enter your network

address (IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway (Router), and

DNS) provided by the internet service provider.

5. When finished, highlight Done and press ENTER.

Basic Network Setup

Please enter your Network Address Information

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway(Router)

DNS(Domain Name Saver)

xxx

Cancel Done

xxx xxx xxx

xxx xxx xxx xxx

Network address set up is finished, and the Network menu

returns.

To obtain the Network address automatically:

1. Follow steps 1-2 above.

2. Highlight Basic Network Setup, and press ENTER.

Basic Network Setup

Obtain network address automatically?

Yes No

3. Highlight Yes, and then press ENTER.

Basic Network Setup

Please waite...

The Completion screen will appear after the address is assigned

from the DHCP server. Press ENTER to return to the Network

menu.

If obtaining the address from the DHCP server fails, the Error

screen will appear. Make sure the the cable is connected to the

RJ-45 port terminal securely, and highlight Yes, press ENTER,

and set it up again.

Error.Unable to obtain network address information.Please

re-check network connections and DHCP server status.

Try Again?

Yes No

To reset the Network address:

1. Follow steps 1-2 of “Setting up the Network address”.

2. Highlight Basic Network Setup, and press ENTER. The

screen to confirm resetting appears. Highlight Yes and press

ENTER.

Basic Network Setup

Your Basic Network Setup is complete. Would you like to start over?

Yes No

Next, follow step 4 on “Setting up the Network address”.

You can network the TV with your home Internet service to remotely schedule recordings and reminders by sending an email to the TV.

To use this feature, you must have Internet e-mail service in your home and two separate e-mail addresses (your personal e-mail and a

second email address for use solely by the TV). Contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) for these services.

#01E_106-111_4250HPX95 05.7.12, 11:13106

Black

107

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network

To set up the Email account for timer recording by Email, set

the Recording Email setup screen as follows.

Note:

•If you set up the TV address with the same name as another

address, large Emails or Email with attached files will be deleted

automatically. You must have an Email address for sole use by the

TV.

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Network

menu appears.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Basic Network Setup

Recording Email Setup

Home File Server Setup

Network

3. Highlight Recording Email Setup, and press ENTER. The

Recording Email Setup menu appears.

Done

Recording Email Setup

TV-Guide Email

Please enter your Email Setup Information.

ID Required

Test cancel

Account

Password

Incoming Mail Server

Outgoing Mail Server

Email Address

Email Authorization

Authorized Email

Enter YOUR email here

XXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXX

*****

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

4. Set up the contents below using yzx • and ENTER;

•TV-Guide Email:

Select On or Off. When you select On, it is available to timer

record by Email through the TV-Guide Email function.

•ID required:

Select On or Off.

•ID:

An ID number is required to add or cancel the timer

recording. Press ENTER, and then the keyboard will

appear on the screen.

Press yzx • to select a

character for the first

space and then press

ENTER. Repeat to enter

the rest of the characters.

Note:

Enter a mail verification ID

containing 6 or more characters.

After you have entered your ID number, then highlight Enter

and press ENTER.

•Email address:

Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and

then enter your Email address for your TV.

•Account:

Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and

then enter your Email account for your TV.

•Password:

Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and

then enter your Email password for your TV.

•Incoming Mail Server (POP3):

Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and

then enter your Incoming mail server name of your TV

Email.

•Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP):

Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and

then enter your Outgoing mail server name of your TV

Email.

•Email Authorization:

Select On or Off. When you select ON, the TV accepts

timer recordings only from an address selected in

“Authorized Email” below. When you select Off, the TV

accepts timer recordings from multiple addresses.

•Authorized Email:

Press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen, and

then enter your desired address. the TV accepts timer

recordings only from the desired address. You can not input

this field when you set the Email Authorization to Off.

When finished, test the setting to make sure the account is set

up accurately.

Highlight Test and press ENTER

If the account is set up accurately, highlight “Done” and press

ENTER.

Note:

•If you set the Email Authorization to Off, the TV will accept timer

recordings from each address. For multiple users, set to Off so that

each user can use the timer recording function by Email. Note that if

your TV address becomes known to outside parties, you may receive

junk Email, so please be careful with your mail address.

•It is better to set up your ID using a different address from the POP

address. If the ID address is the same as the POP address, your POP

address may become known to outside parties.

Required ID

Please enter a mail verification ID containing 6 or more characters

Enter Clear Cancel

123 5467890-=

qwe r t y uiop[]

asdfghjkl ; '

Shift BS

xcvbnm, . /

Set up the Email account

#01E_106-111_4250HPX95 05.7.12, 11:13107

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network

■

Delete:

The DELETE command removes an already scheduled

reminder or recording. The INPUT, CHANNEL, DATE,

TIME, DURATION, and TYPE must be specified. Sample

DELETE command email contents (deleting a Recording):

■

Get:

The GET command retrieves a list of currently scheduled

reminders or recordings. Sample GET command email contents:

■

Help:

The HELP command retrieves information on the syntax and

purpose of commands and fields. Sample HELP command

email contents:

After receiving and processing the email, the TV will reply to the

email. The reply email contains one of the following messages:

•ADD SUCCESS

•DELETE SUCCESS

•GET SUCCESS

•HELP SUCCESS

Subject: delete

————

Id myID1234 Delete ANTENNA-1 102-1 6/10/2005

19:00 1:00 RECORD

Subject: get

————

get

Subject: help

————

help

Subject: add

————

id myID1234

command add

input ant-1

chan 102-1

date 06/10/2005

time 7 pm

duration 1hr

record

You can timer record or delete the programs you set by sending

an Email to the TV. With the Email Recording feature, the

following commands are available: Add, Delete, Get, or Help.

When you send an Email to the TV, make sure to follow the

form below.

Note:

•Text or Rich Text (HTML style) is accepted.

•Emails over 16K are automatically deleted.

•Emails with attached files are automatically deleted.

■

Add:

The ADD command schedules a new recording or reminder.

The INPUT, CHANNEL, DATE, TIME, and DURATION

must be specified. Sample ADD command email contents

(adding a Reminder):

Timer recording via Email

#01E_106-111_4250HPX95 05.7.12, 11:13108

Black

109

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network

Using the audio player/picture viewer via network

You can enjoy the MP3 files or JPEG files which are stored on a PC, using only the TV remote via network. First, set up the folders

which for storing MP3 files or JPEG files to share with the PC, then set up the Home File Server on the TV.

■

Picture viewer

•Picture viewer supports JPG or JPEG format images (96-128

kbps) only.

•Maximum number of files: 1,000 files

•Maximum file size: 8,192,000 Bytes per file

•Maximum directory folder depth is 10

•Compatible with Windows NetBios

■

Audio Player

•Audio Player supports MP3 format files (96-128 kbps) only.

•Maximum numbers of files: 200 files

•Maximum file size: 51,200,000 Bytes per file

•Maximum directory folder depth is 10

•Compatible with Windows NetBios

Procedure for setting up mp3 sharing

on Windows XP machine running

service pack 2

1. On the PC hosting the folders and files to be shared, right

click the folder.

2. From the pop-up menu select “Sharing and Security…”

3. In the folder properties

dialog, select “Share this

folder”.

4. To allow anonymous logins

(logins without passwords),

select the “Security” tab.

5. Click on “Add…”

6. In the “Enter the object names to select” box, type the user

name and click on “Check Names”.

7. Ensure that the user name shows up as a recognized type.

Click “OK”.

8. Click on OK all the way through.

#01E_106-111_4250HPX95 05.7.12, 11:13109

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network

Using the audio player/picture viewer via network (continued)

Procedure for Windows XP with

service pack 1

1. On the PC hosting the folders and files to be shared, right

click the folder.

2. From the pop-up menu select “Sharing and Security…”

3. In the folder properties dialog box, select “Share this folder

on the network”.

4. Click “OK”.

How do I check if my machine is

running service pack 1 or 2?

1. Click “Start” button

2. Click “Settings | Control Panel”.

3. In the Control Panel, double-click on “System”.

4. Select the “General” tab to check what operating system

and service pack is currently being used.

#01E_106-111_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:47 AM110

Black

111

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 11: Connecting your TV to the Network

Set up the Home File server

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. The Network

menu will appear.

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

Basic Network Setup

Recording Email Setup

Home File Server Setup

Network

3. Highlight Home File server setup, and press ENTER.

The Home File Server Setup menu will appear.

Home File Server Setup Please Wait...

Home Server Name

Please enter your Home File Server Setup information.

JPEG Picture Directory

MP3 Music Directory

User Name

Password

––

*****

Cancel Done

4. Press x or • to select the desired Home Server Name.

Home File Server Setup Please Wait...

Home Server Name

Please enter your Home File Server Setup information.

JPEG Picture Directory

MP3 Music Directory

User Name

Password

––

*****

Cancel Done

ABCD

5. Select the User Name or Password field using y or z, and

then press ENTER to display the keyboard on the screen.

Enter the User Name or Password on this screen.

Note:

To enter the Home Server Name or Password, see “Set up the

Email account” (on page 107).

6. When you highlight the JPEG Picture Directory, the shared

folder name will be displayed on the screen. Press x or • to

select your desired folder.

Home File Server Setup Please Wait...

Home Server Name

Please enter your Home File Server Setup information.

JPEG Picture Directory

MP3 Music Directory

User Name

Password *****

Cancel Done

ABCD

XYZ

MP3

JPEG

7. When you highlight the MP3 Music Directory, the shared

folder will be displayed on the screen. Press x or • to select

your desired folder.

8. Highlight “Done” and press ENTER.

Using the audio player/picture viewer via network (continued)

To start the Picture viewer/Audio

player

1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.

2. Highlight Picture Viewer or Audio Player, and press

ENTER.

Applications

TV Guide On Screen

Audio Player

Picture Viewer

Digital CC/Audio Selector

CableCARD

Navigate Select Back Exit

CH RTN

EXIT

3. The picture viewer or audio player will launch.

Picture Viewer

1 of 6

May 28 04

3 of 6

Jan 18 04

4 of 6

May 12 04

5 of 6

Sep 18 03

6 of 6

Oct 10 10

2 of 6

Jan 8 04

Rotate Next Slide Show Exit

EXIT

//ABCD/JPEG

4. Follow the steps under “To view digital photos on your

TV” on page 103, or “Using the MP3 audio player” on

page 104.

#01E_106-111_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:48 AM111

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Troubleshooting

General troubleshooting

Before calling a service technician, please check the following table for a possible cause of the symptom and some solutions.

Symptom Solution

TV will not turn on • Make sure the power cord is plugged in, and then press POWER.

•The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries or try the side panel buttons.

Picture problems • Check the antenna/cable connections (Chapter 2).

•Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV side panel and select a valid video input

source (page 72). If no device is connected to any of the inputs on the TV, no picture will display when

you select that particular input source. For device connection details, see Chapter 2.

•Antenna reception may be poor. Use a highly directional outdoor antenna (if applicable).

•The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.

•Adjust the picture qualities (page 84).

• If you are using a VCR, make sure the TV/VCR button on the remote control is set correctly (page 31).

•If you have two VCRs connected to your TV, do not connect the same VCR to the TV’s output and input

connections at the same time (page 21).

•Do not connect a standard video cable and an S-video cable to VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 on the TV back (or

VIDEO 3 on the TV side) at the same time (Chapter 2).

Noisy picture •If you are watching a tuned analog channel (off-air broadcast or Cable TV), set the CableClear®/DNR

feature to AUTO to reduce visible interference in the TV picture (page 86).

Video Input Selection •If the Input Selection window does not appear when you press INPUT on the remote control or

problems TV/VIDEO on the TV side panel, press INPUT or TV/VIDEO a second time, which will change to the next

video input source and display the Input Selection window.

Cannot view external signals • If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, or

or channel 3 or 4 ColorStream,® or from channels 3 or 4, make sure the Input Lock is set to Off (page 100).

Black box on screen •Set the Closed Caption feature to Off (page 88).

Poor color or no color •The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.

•Adjust the Tint and/or Color (page 84).

•When the ColorStream® signal source is active, the VIDEO OUT terminal outputs blank video. To receive

video from the VIDEO OUT signal, a standard video or S-video IN terminal must be used instead of the

ColorStream® connections.

POP problems •The VIDEO OUT terminal will not output the POP picture (pages 21 and 81).

•If you label all of the inputs as “Hide,” the POP feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the

POP feature, the message “Not available” will appear on-screen (page 81).

Picture and sound are out of sync • As with all products that contain a digital display, in rare instances, when viewing certain content (e.g..

television broadcasts, video games, DVD), you may notice that the sound and picture are slightly out of

sync. This phenomenon can be caused by various factors including, without limitation, video processing

within the TV, video processing in an attached gaming system, and video processing/different

compression rates used by broadcasters in their programming. You may want to try one or more of the

following suggestions, which may help to reduce the effect of this phenomenon:

-If the TV is connected to an A/V receiver that has a programmable audio delay feature, use this feature

to help synchronize the sound to the picture.

- If you notice this phenomenon only on certain TV channels, please contact your local broadcast,

cable, or satellite provider to inform them of this issue.

Memory card • Make sure you are using a supported or valid memory card format (page 102).

problems •Make sure you have saved the picture files in the correct file format (page 102).

•The card may be inserted improperly. Remove the card and reinsert it (page 103).

•The memory card may be empty.

•The memory card may be damaged.

#01E_112-117_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:48 AM112

Black

113

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

Symptom Solution

“Now Booting” message •

When you turn on the TV after connecting the power cord, the message

appears on-screen

“Now Booting…” will be displayed on-screen until the TV enters standby mode. This is normal and is not a

sign of malfunction.

Sound problems • Check the antenna/cable connections (see Chapter 2).

•The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.

•The sound may be muted. Press VOLUME.

•If you hear no sound, try setting the MTS feature to Stereo mode (page 90).

•Make sure the Speakers function in the Audio Setup menu is set correctly (page 93).

• If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source, make sure the MTS feature is

set to SAP mode (page 90).

•If you hear audio that seems “incorrect” for the program you are watching (such as music or a foreign

language), the SAP mode may be on. Set the MTS feature to STEREO mode (page 90).

•When using an external audio amplifier, if you connect the amplifier to the VAR. AUDIO OUT terminals,

the volume of the TV and amplifier must be set above 0 or you will not hear any sound (page 23).

Remote control problems • Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 33).

•Remove all obstructions between the remote control and the TV.

•The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries (page 33).

•Your TV remote control may not operate certain features on your external device. Refer to the owner’s

manual for your other device to determine its available features. If your TV remote control does not

operate a specific feature on another device, use the remote control that came with the device (page 33).

• If the TV still does not act as expected, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page

57.

Channel tuning problems • Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 33).

•The channel may have been erased from the channel memory by the Channel Add/Delete feature. Add

the channel to the channel memory (page 48).

•The channel may be blocked by the Channels Block feature. Unblock the channel (page 100).

•If you are unable to tune digital channels, check the antenna configuration (page 46). If you are still

unable to tune digital channels, clear all channels from the channel list (page 48) and reprogram

channels into the channel memory (page 47). If you are still unable to tune digital channels, use the

Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 57. Also see “Other problems,” on the next

page.

Closed caption problems • If the program or video you selected is not closed-captioned, no captions will display on-screen

(page 88).

•If text is not available, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, turn off the closed

caption feature (page 88).

•A closed caption signal may not display correctly in the following situations: a) when a videotape has

been dubbed; b) when the signal reception is weak; or c) when the signal reception is nonstandard

(page 88).

Rating Blocking (V-Chip) problems • If you forget your PIN code: While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL four times

within 5 seconds. The PIN code you previously stored will be cleared (page 98).

•The V-Chip feature is available for the U.S. V-Chip system only (page 99).

General troubleshooting (continued)

#01E_112-117_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:48 AM113

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

General troubleshooting (continued)

Symptom Solution

Recording problems • If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to change inputs (page 72),

open the POP window (page 81), or open the FAV SCAN multi-window (page 83). If you attempt to do

so, the message “Not Available While Recording” will appear on-screen.

• If you are recording a digital channel, you will only be able to change analog channels while the recording

is in progress. If you are recording an analog channel, you will only be able to change digital channels

while the recording is in progress. This is because the TV tuner that is being recorded (digital or analog)

will be locked on the channel that is currently recording.

•It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other than

the TV’s remote control to start recording and then attempt to access a feature that is normally denied

during recording (POP mode, FAV SCAN mode, changing inputs,) the recorded audio and/or video may

not be what you intended to record. See pages 72 and 76.

•If

you connected a Symbio™ AVHD recorder, in order to use its full functionality, you must first set up the

TV Guide On Screen™ system (page 26 and Chapter 5).

TV stops responding to controls • If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV side panel and you cannot turn off

the TV, press and hold the POWER button on the TV side panel for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV.

Other problems • If your TV’s problem has not been addressed in this Troubleshooting section or the recommended

solution has not worked, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 57.

Cannot connect to network. • Check modem and splitter connections.

•Make sure the splitter is connected to the modem or telephone.

•Confirm modem’s operation with this manual.

• Make sure your network address or Email account are set correctly (page 107).

Disable network connection • Check the RJ-45 cable connection.

• Check that the modem’s power cord is plugged in.

• Make sure your network address or Email account are set correctly (page 107).

Unstable network connection. • Unplug the RJ-45 cable from an outlet, and then connect again.

Cannot set recording timer by Email. • Select “Test” to confirm the setup( page 107).

•Select “Done” after setting up( page 107).

•See Chapter 11 in this manual.

#01E_112-117_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:48 AM114

Black

115

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

SETUP

1. Q: What if I move and my ZIP code or postal code

changes?

A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight

Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information

(see Chapter 3 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to

receive new data.

2. Q: What if I change my cable hook-up to antenna or vice

versa?

A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight

Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input

information and rescan channels for the new input (see

Chapter 3 for details).

3. Q: What if I change cable boxes?

A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight

Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input

information and rescan channels for the new input (see

Chapter 3 for details).

4. Q: I used to have a cable box, but now I get direct cable.

What do I do?

A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight

Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input

information and rescan channels for the new input (see

Chapter 3 for details).

5. Q: If I add a recorder or change my cable service, how do I

change my Setup information?

A: Highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight

Change System Settings (page 70), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information

(see Chapter 3 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to

receive new data.

6. Q: Why does it take up to 24 hours for the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system to be ready for use?

A: The initial setup process consists of finding the stations in

your area that carry the TV Guide On Screen

™

system data

and tuning to those stations to receive the setup and

listings data.

7. Q: I had a power outage. Do I need to go through initial

setup of the TV Guide On Screen

™

system again?

A: No. The information you entered is stored in the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system memory.

Note: For Cable box users, the TV must be OFF and the Cable

box must be left ON for the TV Guide On Screen™ system to

receive channel line-up information.

8. Q: How do I connect the G-LINK

™

(IR blaster) cable to

the G-LINK

™

input on the TV?

A: See “Chapter 2: Connecting your TV” in this manual.

You also can refer to the TV Guide On Screen

™

prompts

during VCR or Cable box setup.

9. Q: When will I be able to view my TV program listings and

use other TV Guide On Screen

™

system features?

A: You will be able to use initial program listings within 24

hours of initial setup. It may take up to one week to receive

the full eight days of program listings.

10. Q: What should I do if I cannot complete initial setup?

A: If you are unable to complete initial setup using the owner’s

manual and the on-screen prompts, please call Toshiba’s

National Service Division at 1-800-631-3811.

11. Q: If I make a mistake during setup, how do I go back to

the previous step?

A: Complete the remaining setup steps. When “Confirming

Your Settings” appears, select “No, repeat setup process.”

Follow the on-screen prompts and input the correct

information.

12. Q: What if the channel number is not visible on my cable

box?

A: Your cable box may be defaulting to a clock or time display

once the channel changes. Watch the box carefully when

testing the cable box brand code to see if the channel

changes to 09.

13. Q: Why won’t my VCR turn on?

A: There are several possibilities:

a) An incorrect or “no VCR” code was entered during the

TV Guide On Screen

™

initial setup. Press GUIDE on the

remote control, and then press • to highlight SETUP. Press

z to highlight “Change system settings,” and then press

ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to select the correct

VCR information.

b) Make sure the G-LINK

™

(IR blaster) cable is connected

correctly (see page 28).

c) The VCR record timer is on. Turn off the timer.

d) The wired remote VCR is incompatible.

TV Guide On Screen™ FAQs

The following are frequently asked questions about the TV Guide On Screen

™

system. The answers represent the most likely solutions to the

problem.

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

After you set up the TV Guide On Screen™ system (Chapter 5), the

program guide opens automatically by default when you turn on

the TV. You can turn off the automatic program guide (see page 45)

and instead press the TV GUIDE button on the remote control to

manually open the TV Guide On Screen™ program guide.

#01E_112-117_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:49 AM115

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

TV Guide On Screen™ FAQs (continued)

CHANNEL LINEUPS & LISTINGS

14. Q: Why aren’t all my channels initially displayed?

A: After initial setup, approximately 120 channels are

automatically displayed. The user may use the “Change

channel display” feature to turn ON or OFF additional

channels.

Note: Even though you have the option of enabling many

more channels, the system may not have the memory capacity

to hold detailed program descriptions for all of them.

15. Q: When I opened the TV Guide On Screen

™

system, I was

asked to choose from more than one channel lineup.

What should I do?

A: Select the lineup that most closely matches the one for your

area. If after you choose the lineup, you want to make

changes to it, highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press z to

select Change Channel Display. Follow the on-screen

instructions.

16. Q: Why do all my channels display “No Listing?”

A: The TV Guide On Screen

™

system has not yet received its

data download. The phrase “No Listing” will be replaced

with program information during the next download cycle,

which will occur within the next 24-hour period.

17. Q: Why do some of my channels display “No Listing?”

A: There are several possibilities:

a) The channels in question were recently turned ON (in

Change channel display) and TV Guide On Screen

™

has

yet to receive its next data download.

b) After completing the initial setup, the first data download

of the day was interrupted by a VCR recording.

c) The TV power cord was left unplugged for an extended

period of time and the TV Guide On Screen

™

system was

unable to receive program listings during the scheduled

download cycle.

d) Poor reception caused some of the data to be missed.

e) The cable box was turned OFF. The TV power cord must

be plugged in and the cable box must be ON.

g) A/V Cable: The VCR was turned OFF. If the connection

includes stereo cables with cable box to VCR and stereo

connection from VCR to television, the VCR must be ON.

18. Q: A show entry in the TV Guide On Screen

™

system reads

“No Listing.” What does that mean?

A: Show information for that entry was not available during

the last TV Guide On Screen

™

system information update

(download). Show information is updated on a daily basis.

19. Q: I have seen the word “download” in reference to the

TV Guide On Screen system. What does that mean?

A: “Download” refers to the times throughout the day when

the TV Guide On Screen

™

system is receiving channel and

listings information from your Cable or over-the-air

antenna transmission.

20. Q: After some show titles, I have noticed from 1 to 4 stars

(****). What does that mean?

A: These stars are a broadcast-industry ratings system used to

inform you of a show’s quality. The more stars, the better

the rating.

21. Q: What do the colors for shows in the Listings and Search

screens indicate?

A: Green = Sports; Dark Blue = Children’s; Purple = Movies;

Teal = Other Show.

22. Q: How do I add, delete, or change the assigned number of

channels on the TV Guide On Screen

™

system?

A: See the “Change channel display” section in the TV Guide

On Screen

™

owner’s manual (see page 70).

23. Q: Why are some of my channels listed on the wrong

number?

A: There are several possibilities (see page 70 for details):

a) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change

system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup is

incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup.

b) Channel lineup changes have not yet been processed. Use

the “Change channel display” feature to make adjustments.

c) Initial setup was done incorrectly (that is, the wrong

ZIP/postal code was entered). Redo the initial setup.

24. Q: Why doesn’t the program highlighted match up with

the video window on my TV screen?

A: There are several possibilities (see page 70 for details):

a) The station in question made a late change to its scheduled

program listing and the TV Guide On Screen

™

system has

not yet been updated.

b) The TV is receiving broadcasts through a modified or

boosted antenna system or a satellite dish (not supported

by the TV Guide On Screen

™

system).

c) Initial setup was done incorrectly. (i.e., the wrong

ZIP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.

d) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change

system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup

is incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup.)

e) The video window may be locked. Press SPLIT to unlock.

25. Q: Can I move my favorite stations to the top of the

TV Guide On Screen

™

display screen?

A: Yes. Use the “Change channel display” feature to make

adjustments (see page 70). Highlight the station call letters

to be moved, then use the BLUE, GREEN, and/or

Number buttons to reassign the position of the station.

#01E_112-117_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:49 AM116

Black

117

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 12: Troubleshooting

TV Guide On Screen™ FAQs (continued)

OPERATIONS

26. Q: How can I look for a specific show in the TV Guide

On Screen

™

system?

A: SEARCH lets you find shows by keyword, alphabetically,

or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports, Children,

Educational, News, Variety, Series).

27. Q: My cable box will not change channels with the

TV Guide On Screen

™

system. What’s wrong?

A: There are several possibilities:

a) The incorrect cable box code was entered during TV Guide

On Screen

™

initial setup. Redo initial setup.

b) The G-LINK

™

(IR blaster) cable may not be connected

properly (see page 28).

c) The cable box has no remote capability and is

incompatible.

28. Q: How do I resize or close the Info window?

A: Press the INFO button on the remote control to resize the

Info window. Press the INFO button again to close the

Info window.

29. Q: Is there a way to go directly to the next day’s listings

without scrolling through each time slot?

A: Yes. In LISTINGS, highlight the station for which you

want to look ahead and use the Channel Number buttons

on the remote control to enter “24.” In the resulting menu,

press z two times to scroll down to select the HOURS

AHEAD option, and then press ENTER. You also can use

the SKIP button on the remote control.

30. Q: Why can’t I record a show? All I get is snow or a blue

screen.

A: There are several possibilities (without a cable box):

a) The recording unit was not connected or set up correctly.

b) The incorrect channel lineup was selected. Press TV

GUIDE and then • to highlight SETUP. Press z to

highlight “Change system settings,” and then press

ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to select the correct

channel lineup.

31. Q: Why won’t my VCR change channels and why does it

change to the wrong channel?

A: There are two possibilities (with a cable box):

a) The VCR is not set on the correct output channel. Set the

VCR to 03, 04, or whichever output channel is set by your

cable system.

b) The VCR and/or cable box are hooked up incorrectly.

Refer to your VCR owner’s manual or contact your Cable

TV company for proper wiring procedures.

32. Q: Is Help available in the TV Guide On Screen

™

system?

If so, how do I find it?

A: Yes. Highlight any of the five main Services (Listings,

Schedule, Recordings, Setup, Search) and press INFO on

the remote control. An expanded Info Box displays

additional help information. Press INFO again to close the

box.

Help is also available in a panel menu. Press INFO to

display an expanded Info Box. Press INFO again to close

the box.

RECORD/REMIND

33. Q: Can I tune to a different channel while recording a

program?

A: No.

34. Q: How many programs can be scheduled for RECORD in

the GUIDE?

A: There is no limit to the number of shows that can be

programmed into the schedule memory.

35. Q: If a program is scheduled to RECORD on a Regular

basis, does it count as five?

A: No, whether a program is scheduled ONCE,

REGULARLY, or WEEKLY, it only counts as one show in

the RECORD stack memory.

36. Q: If I have a power failure, will I need to reset the

recorded shows I have already programmed?

A: The start times and channel numbers of shows that have

been programmed will be retained in the memory of the

TV Guide On Screen

™

system. Titles will appear once

listings are restored.

37. Q: Can I set a Record or Remind event without

highlighting a show title in the TV Guide On Screen

™

system?

A: Yes. TV Guide On Screen

™

has a Manual Record and

Remind feature. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar,

and press MENU. Choose the event type, press ENTER,

and then enter the date, start and stop time, channel

number, and so forth.

38. Q: What do the frequencies for Record and Remind mean?

A: Once—records/reminds the show one time.

Daily (manual only)—records/reminds the time, channel,

input, recorder combination Monday through Friday.

Regularly— records/reminds the show every time the show

airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.

Weekly— records/reminds the show each time the show

airs on the same day of the week, on the same channel and

starts at the same time.

Off (not cancel)—keeps the show in the Schedule list but

will not record/remind the show until the frequency is

changed.

#01E_112-117_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:49 AM117

Black

118

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Video/Audio Terminals (continued)

PC INPUT:

15-pin D-sub Analog RGB

PC AUDIO INPUT:

3.5 mm stereo mini jack

VIDEO/AUDIO OUTPUT (also for recording):

VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.

AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,

2.2 k ohm or less)

VARIABLE AUDIO OUTPUT:

0–300 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,

2.2 k ohm or less)

G-LINK™ and IR INPUT/OUTPUT:

3 V(p-p), 3.5 mm mono socket (IR blaster cables supplied)

IEEE1394 INPUT/OUTPUT:

IEEE1394 compliant 4-pin

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT:

Optical type

Headphone jack:

3.5 mm stereo

RJ-45 port:

XXXXXXXXXXXXX

Dimensions

42HPX95: Width: 43-3/8 inches (1100 mm)

Height:30-3/4 inches (778 mm)

Depth: 15-3/8 inches (390 mm)

50HPX95: Width: 49-5/8 inches (1258 mm)

Height:34-5/8 inches (877 mm)

Depth: 15-3/8 inches (390 mm)

Weight

42HPX95: 117.3 lbs (53.0 kg)

50HPX95: 142.6 lbs (64.7 kg)

Supplied Accessories

•Two dual-wand IR blaster cables

• Remote control with two size “AA” alkaline batteries

• Power cord (three wire grounding type)

• Clip (see item 19 on page 3)

•Owner’s Manual (This book)

_________

** E-EDID = Enhanced-Extended Display Identification

Specifications

NOTE: • This model complies with the specifications listed below.

•Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.

•This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.

Television System

NTSC standard

ATSC standard (8VSB)

Digital Cable (64 QAM, 256 QAM; in-the-clear, unencrypted*)

*Encrypted channels can be viewed on this TV

using a CableCARD.™ See page 15 for details.

Channel Coverage

VHF: 2 through 13

UHF: 14 through 69

Cable TV: Mid band (A-8 through A-1, A through I)

Super band (J through W)

Hyper band (AA through ZZ, AAA, BBB)

Ultra band (65 through 94, 100 through 135)

Power Source

120 V AC, 60 Hz

Power Consumption

42HPX95: 337 W (average)

57 W in standby mode (Using a CableCARD™)

53 W in standby mode (Without a CableCARD™)

50HPX95: 407 W (average)

57 W in standby mode (Using a CableCARD™)

53 W in standby mode (Without a CableCARD™)

Audio Power

10 W + 10 W

Speaker Type

Main: Four 2-3/8 × 4-3/4 inches (60 × 120 mm)

Tweeter: Two 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) round

Video/Audio Terminals

S-VIDEO INPUT:

Y: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.

C: 0.286 V(p-p) (burst signal), 75 ohm

VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT:

VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.

AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,

22 k ohm or greater)

ColorStream® (component video) HD INPUT:

Y : 1V(p-p), 75 ohm

PR: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm

PB: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm

AUDIO: 150 mV(rms), 22 k ohm or greater

Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p

NOTE: This TV does not provide ColorStream HD OUTPUT.

HDMI™ INPUT:

HDMI compliant (type A connector)

HDCP compliant

E-EDID** compliant

Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p

HDMI Audio: 2-channel PCM; 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling

frequency; 16/20/24 bits per sample

NOTE: This TV does not provide HDMI OUTPUT.

Appendix

#01E_118-123_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:50 AM118

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer

controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered

by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna

systems, misaligned satellite dishes, cable television distribution, VCRs,

DVD players/recorders, personal computer level IEEE1394 devices, and

any other connected signal source device are your responsibility.

(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited

above, and do not extend to any Plasma Television or parts that have

been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the Plasma Television or

parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning

or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper

maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP; use

or malfunction through simultaneous use of this Plasma Television and

connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had the

serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.

How to Obtain Warranty Service

If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and reviewing

the section entitled “Troubleshooting,” you find that service is needed:

(1) To find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station, visit TACP’s

website at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service or contact TACP’s

Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1-800-631-3811.

(2) You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to

the TACP Authorized Service Station.

For additional information, visit TACP’s website:

www.tacp.toshiba.com

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE

U.S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED

WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY

WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS

HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND

IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS,

AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE

REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL

TACP BE LI ABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED

DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS

PLASMA TELEVISION).

No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,

modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.

The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any

obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law of

the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days

from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect. This

limitation does not apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any

state of the U.S.A.

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY

ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE

IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW

LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, WHEN

AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION

OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. THEREFORE, THE

ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH

CIRCUMSTANCES.

Limited United States Warranty

for Plasma Televisions

Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following

limited warranties to original consumers in the United States. THESE

LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER

PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS PLASMA

TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER

PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED

ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE

WARRANTIES.

PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE

U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO,

AND USED IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE

WARRANTIES.

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor

TACP warrants this Plasma Television and its parts against defects in

materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of

original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP’S

OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR

REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR

LABOR. During this period, TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will

come to your home when warranty service is required. Depending on the

type of repair required, the service will either be performed in your home or

the Plasma Television will be taken to a TACP Authorized Service Station for

repair and returned to your home at no cost to you.

Rental Units

The warranty for Plasma Television rental units begins on the date of the first

rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm,

whichever comes first.

Limited Warranty for Commercial Units

TACP warrants Plasma Televisions that are sold and used for commercial

purposes as follows: all parts are warranted against defects in materials or

workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of original retail

purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WI LL, AT TACP’S OPTION,

REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR

REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.

Owner’s Manual and Product Registration Card

Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this Plasma Television.

Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your

Plasma Television online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as

possible. By registering your Plasma Television you will enable TACP to bring

you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to

contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under the

U.S. Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to complete and return the

product registration card does not diminish your warranty rights.

Your Responsibility

THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING

CONDITIONS:

(1) You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other proof of

purchase.

(2) All warranty servicing of this Plasma Television must be performed by an

Authorized TACP Service Station.

(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only if this Plasma Television is

purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.

Chapter 13: Appendix

#01E_118-123_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:50 AM119

Black

120

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Limited Canada Warranty

for Plasma Televisions

Chapter 13: Appendix

Toshiba Canada Limited (“TCL”) makes the following limited warranties to

original consumers in Canada. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND

TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON

RECEIVING THIS PLASMA TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE

ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER

PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED

ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF CANADA, INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, THE U.S.A. AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE

WARRANTIES.

PLASMA TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF

CANADA, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE U.S.A. AND

MEXICO, AND USED IN CANADA, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE

WARRANTIES.

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor

TCL warrants this Plasma Television and its parts against defects in materials

or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail

purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCL’S OPTION, REPAIR

OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED

PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR LABOR. During this

period, TCL Authorized Service Depot personnel will come to your home

when warranty service is required. Depending on the type of repair required,

the service will either be performed in your home or the Plasma Television

will be taken to a TCL Authorized Service Depot for repair and returned to

your home at no cost to you. IN-HOME SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN

100 KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.

Rental Units

The warranty for Plasma Television rental units begins on the date of the first

rental or thirty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm,

whichever comes first.

Limited Warranty for Commercial Units

TCL warrants Plasma Televisions that are sold and used for commercial

purposes as follows: all parts are warranted against defects in materials or

workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days after the date of original retail

purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCL’S OPTION, REPAIR

OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED

PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. ON-SITE SERVICE ONLY APPLIES

WITHIN 100 KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.

Owner’s Manual and Product Registration

Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this Plasma Television.

possible. By registering your Plasma Television you will enable TCL to bring

you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to

contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required. Failure to

Your Responsibility

THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING

CONDITIONS:

(1) You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other proof of

purchase.

(2) All warranty servicing of this Plasma Television must be performed by an

Authorized TCL Service Depot.

(3) The warranties from TCL are effective only if this Plasma Television is

purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL dealer and operated in

Canada.

(4) Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer

controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered

by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna

systems, misaligned satellite dishes, cable television distribution, VCRs,

DVD players/recorders, personal computer level IEEE-1394 devices,

and any other connected signal source device are your responsibility.

(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited

above, and do not extend to any Plasma Television or parts that have

been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the Plasma Television or

parts caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning

or fluctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper

maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TCL; use or

malfunction through simultaneous use of this Plasma Television and

connected equipment; or to units that have been modified or had the

serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.

How to Obtain Warranty Service

If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and reviewing

the section entitled “Troubleshooting,” you find that service is needed:

(1) To find the nearest TCL Authorized Service Depot, visit TCL’s website at

www.toshiba.ca.

(2) You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to

the TCL Authorized Service Depot.

For additional information, visit TCL’s website:

www.toshiba.ca

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF

CANADA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED

WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY

WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF CANADA

AS HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE

AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES,

AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TCL WITH RESPECT

TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT

SHALL TCL BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS,

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF

RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE

THIS PLASMA TELEVISION).

No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,

modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.

The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any

obligation of TCL arising under the warranty or under any law of Canada or

any province thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days from the date you

discover, or should have discovered, the defect. This limitation does not

apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any province of Canada.

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY

ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM PROVINCE TO

PROVINCE IN CANADA. SOME PROVINCES OF CANADA DO NOT

ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED

WARRANTY, WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES. THEREFORE, THE ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY

TO YOU UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.

[0705]

#01E_118-123_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:50 AM120

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 13: Appendix

A copy of the GPL source code in this product may be obtained by

contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811. There will be a

charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.

A copy of the LGPL source code in this product may be obtained by

contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811. There will be a

charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.

reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are

met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation

and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its

contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from

this software without specified prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC.

AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;

OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY

THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY

WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in

the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com).

reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation

and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must

display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software

developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit

(http://openssl.org).

4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “Open SSL Project” must not be used

to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior

written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-

core@openssl.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may

“Open SSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the

OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following

acknowledgement: “This product includes software developed by the

OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org).”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND

ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes

cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This

product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with

Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use

so long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions

apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES,

etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this

distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is

Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric

Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library

used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in

documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation

and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must

display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes

cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).” The

word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being

used are not cryptographic related.

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or derivative thereof) from the

apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson

(tjh@cryptosoft.com).”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;

OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY

THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY

WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for

any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed,

i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution

license (including the GNU Public License).

#01E_118-123_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:50 AM121

Black

122

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 13: Appendix

Note

#01E_118-123_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:50 AM122

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Chapter 13: Appendix

Note

#01E_118-123_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:51 AM123

Black

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Index

Antenna cables ........................................................................................12

Audio player ............................................................................................. 89

Audio quality adjustments ................................................................... 87

Audio system connection..................................................................... 21

Auto aspect................................................................................................76

Auto power off......................................................................................... 94

AVHD ................................................................................................... 24, 52

Back of the TV ..........................................................................................11

Blocking channels.................................................................................. 99

Cable box connection .....................................................................15, 17

CableCARD™............................................................................................13

CableClear® DNR ....................................................................................82

Cables ..........................................................................................................12

Camcorder connection..........................................................................14

CH yz buttons ................................................................................ 44, 73

CH RTN button .........................................................................................73

ChannelBrowser™.......................................................................................

Channel Number buttons ............................................................ 44, 73

Channel programming:

Automatic programming ................................................................ 44

Manually adding and deleting ...................................................... 45

Cinema mode ............................................................................................77

Closed captions ...................................................................................... 84

Color management ................................................................................. 85

Color temperature ...................................................................................82

ColorStream®.................................................................................... 11, 18

Connecting devices ........................................................................ 13–27

CompactFlash® memory cards .................................................. 89, 90

Component video cables .....................................................................12

Component video (ColorStream®) ............................................ 11, 18

Device connections ........................................................................ 13–27

Defaults, restore TV factory ............................................................... 54

Digital Audio Out .....................................................................................21

Digital signal meter ............................................................................... 54

DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) .........................................................82

Dolby Digital ...................................................................................... 21, 88

Dolby Virtual surround ..........................................................................92

Double-window POP feature.............................................................. 78

DVD player connection .................................................................. 17, 18

D-VHS .................................................................................................. 24, 52

DVI connection .........................................................................................20

Dynamic Contrast....................................................................................83

E F G H I J

EIA-775 ........................................................................................................24

Email accaunt setup ............................................................................ 106

FAV SCAN button ............................................................................ 46, 80

Factory defaults, restore TV ........................................................ 54, 81

Favorite channels ............................................................................ 46, 80

Features, TV ................................................................................................. 8

Focus ........................................................................................................... 88

FREEZE.......................................................................................................XX

Front of the TV ..........................................................................................10

G-LINK™ connection .............................................................................26

GameTimer™.......................................................................................... 100

Gray level ....................................................................................................95

HDMI™ connection ................................................................................20

Home file server setup ....................................................................... 110

Home Network connection ................................................................ 30

IEEE1394 .....................................................................................................24

INPUT button ........................................................................................... 69

Input lock ................................................................................................... 99

Installation, care, and service .......................................................... 3, 4

Installation, setup ...................................................................................... 9

Integrated digital tuning ......................................................................... 8

IR blaster ....................................................................................................22

JPEG ........................................................................................... 89–92, 110

Labeling video inputs ............................................................................70

Language selection ................................................................................43

Last mode memory feature ................................................................ 96

LED indications ........................................................................................11

Locking video inputs ............................................................................. 99

LOCKS menu............................................................................................. 97

Channels, blocking ........................................................................... 99

Enable rating blocking .................................................................... 98

GameTimer™..................................................................................... 100

New PIN code ..................................................................................... 97

Unlocking programs temporarily ................................................ 99

Video inputs, locking ....................................................................... 99

Long life ..................................................................................................... 94

#01E_124-125_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:51 AM124

Black

125

(E) 42/50HPX95 *web 213:276

Memory cards ................................................................................... 89–92

Memory Stick™ memory cards .................................................. 89, 90

Menu system ...................................................................................... 37, 38

MMC memory cards ...................................................................... 89, 90

MP3....................................................................................................... 90–92

MPEG-2 digital video signals .............................................................23

MPEG Noise Reduction ........................................................................83

MTS feature .............................................................................................. 86

MUTE button ............................................................................................ 86

O P

ON/OFF timer ...........................................................................................93

Optical audio cable ................................................................................12

Panel lock ................................................................................................ 100

PC connection ..........................................................................................27

PC setting .................................................................................................. 94

Picture adjustments:

Color temperature ..............................................................................82

Picture mode ....................................................................................... 81

Picture quality ..................................................................................... 81

Picture-out-picture (POP):

FAV SCAN button .............................................................................. 80

SPLIT button.........................................................................................78

Picture scroll..............................................................................................76

Picture size selection .............................................................................75

Picture viewer .......................................................................................... 89

Problems with TV ........................................................................ 101-103

RECALL button ....................................................................................... 86

Remote control:

Battery installation ............................................................................ 30

Device code table ...................................................................... 35, 36

Effective range.....................................................................................29

Functional key chart.................................................................. 31, 32

Learning about the buttons ................................................... 28, 29

Operational feature reset ............................................................... 34

Programming .......................................................................................33

Searching and sampling the code ..............................................33

Volume lock feature ..........................................................................35

Restore TV factory defaults ................................................................ 54

Reverse ........................................................................................................95

RJ-45 ............................................................................................................13

Index (continued)

Safety, care, installation, and service ........................................... 2–4

SAP sound ................................................................................................. 86

Satellite receiver connection ..............................................................16

Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture.................................................. 76

SD (Secure Digital™) memory cards ....................................... 89, 90

Service ........................................................................................................... 4

Setup, TV ............................................................................................. 38, 43

Setup, TV Guide On Screen™ system ............................................. 39

Side panel........................................................................................... 10, 38

Sleep timer .................................................................................................93

Speakers ON/OFF .................................................................................. 88

Specifications ......................................................................................... 107

SRS 3D ....................................................................................................... 88

SRS WOW™.............................................................................................. 88

StableSound®............................................................................................ 87

Stereo sound ............................................................................................ 86

S-video cables ..........................................................................................12

Symbio™ AVHD recorder ............................................................. 24, 52

System status ........................................................................................... 54

TheaterNet™ DEVICE and CONTROL buttons ........................... 48

TheaterNet™ control ..............................................................................22

TheaterNet™ setup ................................................................................. 47

TheaterWide® picture size ...................................................................75

THINC™ system .......................................................................................13

Time and date setting ............................................................................52

Troubleshooting ........................................................................... 101-103

TruBass ....................................................................................................... 88

TV Guide On Screen™.............................................................. 9, 39, 55

V-Chip blocking (Locks menu) .................................................. 97–99

VCR connection ............................................................................... 14–19

Video cables ..............................................................................................12

Video input labels ...................................................................................70

Video input lock ...................................................................................... 99

W, X

Warranty:

U.S ......................................................................................................... 108

Canada ................................................................................................ 109

White ............................................................................................................95

WOW™, SRS®.............................................................................................................................................................. 88

xD-Picture Card™............................................................................ 89, 90

#01E_124-125_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:51 AM125

Black

(05-07)

PRINTED IN USA

CableClear, CinemaSeries, ColorStream, StableSound, and TheaterWide are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

ChannelBrowser, GameTimer, SurfLock, Symbio, and TheaterNet are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.

HEAD OFFICE: 82 TOTOWA ROAD, WAYNE, NJ 07470, U.S.A.

NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION:1420-B TOSHIBA DRIVE, LEBANON, TN 37087, U.S.A.

TOSHIBA OF CANADA LTD.

HEAD OFFICE: 191 McNABB STREET, MARKHAM, ONTARIO, L3R 8H2, CANADA – TEL: (905) 470-5400

SERVICE CENTERS:

TORONTO: 191 McNABB STREET, MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R 8H2, CANADA – TEL: (905) 470- 5400

MONTREAL: 18050 TRANS CANADA, KIRKLAND, QUEBEC, H9J 4A1, CANADA – TEL: (514) 390-7766

VANCOUVER: 22171 FRASERWOOD WAY, RICHMOND, B.C., V6W 1J5, CANADA – TEL: (604) 303-2500

MANUFACTURED BY

#01E_126_4250HPX95 7/12/05, 9:51 AM126

Black

Toshiba 50Hpx95 Owners Manual

50HPX95 42HPX95-50HPX95_E

50HPX95 to the manual 2a1d31b2-2e38-4635-8128-0992b220b519

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation